Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

编带机说明书 含图纸ttm402

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 298

TM-402 User’s Guide

User’s Guide # D292105F

V-TEK, Inc.
751 Summit Avenue
Mankato, MN 56001
(P) 507-387-2039
www.vtekusa.com
Vendor Provided Material
Significant portions of this documentation were provided by:
KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA
1100 North Arlington Heights Road, Suite210, Itasca, IL 60143
1-888-KEYENCE (1-888-539-3623)
www.keyence.com
EC Declaration of Conformity

Manufacturers Name: V-TEK Incorporated.


Manufacturers’ Address: 751 Summit Avenue,
Mankato, Minnesota 56002, USA.

Declare that the machinery described below complies with applicable health and safety requirements of Part 1 of
Annex 1 of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC. Confidential technical
documentation has been compiled in accordance with Part A of Annex VII of Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and is
available to European national authorities on written request only. If a request is received documentation will be
delivered on a CD or by post.
Description: TM-400
Model Number: TM-400
Specification: Component Handling Machine
Serial Number\s:
The following standards have either been referred to or been complied with in part or in full as relevant:

ENISO 12100: 2006 Machinery Safety - Safety of machinery - General principles for design –
Risk assessment and risk reduction
EN13849: 2008 Machinery Safety - Safety Related Parts of Control Systems –

Part 1 General Principals for Design and Part 2 Validation.


EN ISO 13732: 2008 Machinery Safety - Ergonomics of the thermal environment
EN 614-2:2000+A1:2008 Machinery Safety - Ergonomic design principals
EN 13850: 2008 Machinery Safety - Emergency-stop equipment, functional aspects

Principals for Design


EN60204-1: 2010 Machinery Safety - Electrical Equipment of Machines
ENISO 11202/A1 1997 Acoustics - Noise emitted by machinery and equipment - Determination of emission
sound pressure levels at a work station and at other specified positions.
EN61000-6-3:2007 EMC - Generic standards - Emission standard for residential, commercial and
light-industrial environments
EN61000-6-1: 2007 EMC - Generic standards - Immunity for residential, commercial
and light-industrial environments

Full Name of responsible person and place of signing Christina James

Place V-TEK Incorporated Position Compliance Director

Signature Date 02/24/2014

751 Summit Avenue, Mankato, Minnesota 56001, USA


Telephone: (507) 387-2039 Fax No. (507) 387-2257
Introduction

Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Machine Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Operator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii
Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
Safety Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xii
Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the TM-402 Component Handling Machine. The TM-402 is a table-
top pick and place tape and reel machine with vision, designed for use in production environ-
ments for electronic devices. This machine accepts devices loaded in a bowl feeder. It features a
2D over tape vision system for component verification. A touch screen interface simplifies the
setup process, and minimizes set up time and operator intervention for fast, easy functioning.

Standard Features:
• Touch screen operator interface for easy setup and operation
• Bowl input, Tape output
• Ability to rotate components +/-90° or 180°
• Innovative universal adjustable heat and PSA sealer
• Software controlled advance movement of carrier tape (2mm to 144mm pitch)
• Adjustable track assembly for tape widths 8mm to 72 mm
• 2D Vision over tape inspection for Mark, Orientation and Empty Pocket Detection.
• User-friendly safety enclosure with multiple access points provides easy access with
minimal downtime
• Automatic Jam in Track and Low Cover Tape Detection Sensors

Introduction D292105.2a.fm ii
Theory of Operation

Operation of the TM-402 is simple. The operator loads the Bowl Feeder and then configures the
job for the selected part using the TM-402’s intuitive, touch screen Human Machine Interface
(HMI). Job configuration includes selecting and programming inspection criteria.

When the TM-402 is set in motion, the pick head picks an individual part from the Bowl Feeder
Nest and places the part directly into a carrier tape pocket. The 2D Vision System detects empty
pockets and inspects placed parts for mark and orientation prior to cover tape application. Parts
that fail inspection stop operation and trigger an error message, allowing the user to correct the
error before continuing operation.

As the tape advances, it passes sensors which detect jams in tape. Once the carrier tape
reaches the TM-402 sealer assembly, cover tape is applied. The part is then sealed in the pocket
with either a Heat Seal or Pressure Sensitive Adhesive (PSA) cover tape. When the sealing pro-
cess is complete, the finished tape is routed onto a take-up reel.

During operation, the operator keeps the selected Bowl Feeder supplied with parts and observes
the inspection process, adjusting operation and inspection settings as needed. In the event of 2D
inspection fails, the operator may re-orient or swap out parts from the output area as needed.
When tape reels are complete, the operator removes the full reel and replaces it with a new reel.

Theory of Operation D292105.2a.fm iii


Machine Details
Controls:
Touch screen Operator Interface includes:

• User-friendly Job Wizard and Pitch Setting Wizard for easy set-up

• Customizable job configuration

• Sealer Dwell Adjustment

• Manual/Automatic leader/trailer

• Password protection

Speed:
Placement speed of up to 2,800 UPH

Dimensions:
• Height: 39.5” (100 cm) (includes Tower Light)

• Width: 50.5” (128.5 cm)

• Depth: 35.5” (90 cm)

• Working area: 11’ x 9’ (3.5 m x 2.75 m)

Weight:
• 267 lb. (121 Kg)

Power Requirements:
• Air consumption: 5 SCFM at 85 PSI

• Electrical: 120 OR 240 VAC (bowl dependent), 50/60Hz AC

Note: The TM-402 is designed and tested to meet the CE Directives: 2006/42/EC, 2004/
108/EC. These tests were conducted with the power requirements of 230V 50Hz.
However, the TM-402 can also handle other voltage levels seen in other parts of the
world including voltages from 208V-240V @ 50/60 Hz.

Reference below when wiring the electrical plug:

• Attach the BROWN wire to L1


• Attach the BLUE wire to N/L2
• Attach the GREEN/YELLOW wire to Ground

Machine Details D292105.2a.fm iv


Intended Use
The intended use of the TM-402 Taping Machine is to produce taped reels of individually sealed
and consistently orientated components. Use of this equipment in any other way is not recom-
mended.

The TM-402 is designed to accommodate a full range of electronic devices. The Bowl Feeder
accommodates parts which are 0805 size and larger.

Suitable carrier and sealing tapes include any conductive or non-conductive tapes with feed-
holes that are pitched at 4 mm. Tapes must operate in a temperature range from 120-160° Cel-
sius with a pressure range from 40-60 psi and dwell time between 250-400 milliseconds. The
TM-402 can accommodate tape widths from 8mm to 72mm.

Tape advance and Pick Head speeds are set on the machine’s controller and can be set at
speeds of 1-10. The Bowl Feeder’s Linear Track speeds are set with the control knobs on the
Bowl assembly. Feed rates are up to 2,800 units per hour dependent on component size.

Caution:
V-TEK® Incorporated takes no responsibility for the safety of the TM-402 if it is
used for any purpose other than the intended purpose as specified in this User’s
Guide.

Operating Environment
The TM-402 is designed to be operated in a temperature and humidity controlled, light, industrial
setting. It requires an ISO Class 9 clean room environment.

The machine should be installed on a flat, dry, stable surface in a well lit area (ambient lighting of
200 to 300 Lux (Lumens/m2).

The recommended climate is between 5 - 75% non-condensing humidity with a room tempera-
ture between 0 - 50 degrees Celsius.

Note: Although all of the components used on the machine will withstand the temperature
range of 0 to 50 degrees Celsius, such temperatures may decrease the life of some of the
components.

The intended electrical environment is Pollution Degree 2 and Over Voltage Category II.

Intended Use D292105.2a.fm v


Misuse
The TM-402 weighs approximately 267 lbs. (121 kg.) and requires four people to safely carry it.
Operators are cautioned to follow the instructions and illustrations for safely transporting the TM-
402. Failure to do so could result in injury or damage to the machine.

Lift Points

Installation instructions clearly state that the TM-402 should only be installed or operated on a
level surface to prevent toppling.

The user is protected from moving parts and exposure to objects being ejected under pressure
by 16 standard wire gauge sheet metal and 3/8 inch clear, polycarbonate enclosures. Door sen-
sors ensure operation automatically stops if the enclosure doors are opened. No attempt should
be made to remove these enclosures or to block, disable or override the door sensors.

The enclosure doors may be left open during basic set-up procedures such as positioning the
pick head at place or pick locations. If the enclosure doors are left open during setup the TM-402
automatically reduces the speed of the pick head to a fraction of its normal operating speed to
prevent operator injury due to collision, etc.

The user is protected from the TM-402’s heat sealer by a metal guard. Operators are cautioned
not to touch the heat seal guard or to try to reach underneath the guard while the heat sealer is in
operation.

The TM-402 air supply should be adjusted to operate at a maximum working pressure not
exceeding 7.6 bar (110 psi). The maximum permissible source pressure should not exceed 9 bar
(130 psi). Failure to set the air pressure within these limits could result in a failure in the pneu-
matic system which could lead to injury.

Intended Use D292105.2a.fm vi


Operator Requirements
The guidelines provided in the following pages are intended to educate the user about how to
operate the TM-402 safely. They contain important information on avoiding potential hazards to
the operator and to the equipment. Only personnel who have thoroughly reviewed and under-
stand the TM-402 User’s Guide and are aware of the possible hazards should operate or perform
maintenance on the TM-402.

Operators and maintenance personnel are advised not to wear loose fitting clothing or jewelry
when operating or maintaining the TM-402. Protective eye wear should be worn when loading,
operating or maintaining the TM-402.

Caution: Users should always wear protective eye wear when loading, operat-
ing or maintaining the TM-402.

Safe operation of the TM-402 does not require gloves of any type, however some component
manufacturers may recommend gloves be worn when handling parts. Consult the component
manufacturer for specific placement instructions. Ear protection is not necessary during normal
operation.

When running the TM-402, the operator should stand or sit in front of the touch screen to assure
easy access to all controls and the Power/Emergency Stop Button. This position allows the oper-
ator to view all parts of the TM-402 while it is in operation. When loading the TM-402 Bowl
Feeder or changing Taper reels, the operator may also need to access the side and back of the
machine

Work Area

Caution!
The TM-402 should never be operated while under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
V-TEK® Incorporated takes no responsibility for the safety of TM-402 if it is used for
any purpose other than the intended purpose as specified in this User’s Guide.

Operator Requirements D292105.2a.fm vii


Safety Features

Main Power Switch


The Main Power Switch is located on the right side
of the machine. Turning the switch to the right
turns power ON. Turning the switch back to the left
turns the power OFF.

When the Main Switch is in the OFF position, it


exposes a lockout-tagout hole. The switch can be
locked by inserting a lock through the hole. The
switch on the right is pictured in the OFF position.

Emergency Stop Switch


There is one Emergency Stop Switch on the TM-
402. It is located on the left side of the machine
below the Take-up Arm. When an emergency stop
switch is triggered, all motion will be halted and the
machine will require a reset before operation can
continue.

The emergency stop control circuit removes elec-


trical power to all motors, moving parts, heat
sources, pneumatics, and energy storing devices.
This includes the stepper motor drive, stepper
motors, the servo motor drive, servo motors, drive
circuits, the main control board, the heat sealer
and all pneumatics. The only devices that remain
powered are the inspection module cameras, the
enclosure lights, the sensors, and the HMI.

Safety Features D292105.2a.fm viii


Reset Button
The TM-402’s blue Reset button is located on the left side of the machine above the Emergency
Stop Switch. When the machine is powered up, it is automatically placed into an emergency stop
state to prevent the motors from moving until the operator is ready to begin operating the
machine. The error state is cleared by pressing the Reset button on the front of the machine.

Open Doors Stop Operation


All automated motion stops and the machine is unable to enter Run Mode when an enclosure
door is opened. An error message will display at the bottom of the HMI Run screen alerting the
user that the TM-402 door(s) are open.

The enclosure doors may be left open during basic set-up procedures such as positioning the
pick head at place or pick locations. If the enclosure doors are left open during setup the TM-402
automatically reduces the speed of the pick head to a fraction of its normal operating speed to
prevent operator injury due to collision, etc.

Buzzer Alarm
The buzzer alarm will sound and halt the Run Mode process of the machine at any time a System
Alarm occurs. A description of the System Alarm and suggestions for resolving it will appear on
the HMI Main Screen.

Lockout/Tagout
The Main Switch can be turned ON and OFF by turning the
red knob back and forth. When the red knob is placed in the
OFF position, the lockout/tagout hole is exposed. The Main
Switch can then be locked out by placing a lock through the
hole.

The Air Regulator can be turned ON and OFF by turning lockout/tagout hole
the top red cap back and forth. When the red cap is
placed in the OFF position, the lockout/tagout hole will be
exposed. The Air Regulator can then be locked out by
placing a lock through the hole.

Be sure to follow your company guidelines regarding


lockout/tagout procedures.

Safety Features D292105.2a.fm ix


Tower Light
The tower light feature allows taping machine operators and production
supervisors in determining the operational state of the taping machine at a
glance.

Color Codes
Green
A solid green light indicates the machine is running a job.

Red
A flashing red light indicates that the machine is on but not running.

Green + Amber
The combination of a solid green light and a solid amber light indicate the
machine is at the end of a job and is in the process of creating a leader.

Red + Amber
The combination of a blinking red light and a blinking amber light indicates
the machine is at the end of a job and attempting to create a leader, how-
ever something has interfered with the process, stopping the machine.

A blinking red light and a solid amber light indicates the machine is at the end of a job, the leader
creation sequence is complete and the TM-402 is ready for the next process.

Safety Features D292105.2a.fm x


Safety Warning Labels
The following warning labels have been placed in various places on the machine to bring safety
issues to the attention of operators and technicians working with or near the machine.

Attention
Indicates an adjustment or danger zone requiring attention.

Electrical Hazards
Indicates that hazardous voltage levels are present. Always disconnect power to
the machine before removing panels or enclosures with this warning label.

Temperature Hazards
Indicates a hot surface. Use care when working near these surfaces and allow
them to cool before performing maintenance.

Pinch Hazard
Indicates areas where moving parts or doors can pinch fingers if safety precau-
tions are not observed.

Consult Manual
Consult User’s Guide for proper procedure.

Disconnect power and air supplies and refer to Chapter 7: Maintenance of this
manual before performing maintenance on the TM-402.

Note: Do not remove or obstruct any of the warning or instruction labels on the TM-402.

Safety Warning Labels D292105.2a.fm xi


Contact Information
V-TEK, Inc.
751 Summit Ave
Mankato, MN 56001
TEL: (507) 389-2039
FAX: (507) 387-2257
email:service@vtekusa.com
website: http://www.vtekusa.com

For customer service, please refer to the Customer Service Contact Sheet at the back of this
manual.

European Representative:

QNET BV
Hommerterweg 286
6436 AM Amstenrade
The Netherlands
KvK Zuid-Limburg 14091511
email: qnet@ce-authorizedrepresentative.eu.
website: www.ce-authorizedrepresentative.eu

Contact Information D292105.2a.fm xii


Table of Contents

EC Declaration of Conformity

Introduction
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-ii
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-iii
Machine Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-iv
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-v
Operator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-vii
Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-viii
Safety Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-xi
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i-xii

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Assembly & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1


Preparing the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Table Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Unpacking the TM-401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Assembling the TM-401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Chapter 2: Machine Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1


Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Right Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Controls, Connections & Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
The Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Pick & Place Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Tube Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
2D Vision System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Table of Contents D292105.3c.fm


Table of Contents (continued)
Chapter 3: The Human Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
HMI Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Job Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Job Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Taper Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Sealer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Head Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Bowl Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Run Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Chapter 4: Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1


Quick Start: Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Power Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Home Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Load the Bowl Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Nozzle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Selecting the Correct Nozzle & Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Installing Nozzle & Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Taper Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Load Carrier Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Load Cover Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Load Take-up Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Configure HMI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Test Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Vision Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Connect the Vision Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Configure Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33

Chapter 5: Vision Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1


Quick Start: Vision Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Connect Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Setup HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Connect Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Connect Keyence Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Configure Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Configure Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Configure Keyence Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Table of Contents D292105.3c.fm


Table of Contents (continued)

Chapter 6: Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1


Quick Start: Running a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Power up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Home Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Setup the Bowl Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Setup the Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Select Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Setup the Pick Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Setup Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Run the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1


Emergency Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Activating an Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clearing an Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
System Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Error Message Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Adjusting Nozzle Vacuum Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Tips on Part Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Sensor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Adjusting the Low Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Adjusting the Tape Jam Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Adjusting Heat Seal Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Heat Seal Shoe Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Seal Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Sealer Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Adjusting PSA Seal Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Materials Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Seal Roller Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30

Table of Contents D292105.3c.fm


Table of Contents (continued)

Chapter 8: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1


Safe Maintenance Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Routine Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
General Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Air Pressure Regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Pick Head Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Vacuum Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Replace the Vacuum Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Check Actuator Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Taping Module Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Heat Sealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Loading Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
PSA Sealer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Cover Tape Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Appendix A: Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1


Keyence FS-V21/FS-V22 Sensor Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2
SMC ZSE30 Vacuum Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Exploded Views

Spare Parts List

Customer Service Contact Sheet

Document List

Warranty

Table of Contents D292105.3c.fm


Chapter 1: Assembly & Installation

Contents
Preparing the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Table Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Unpacking the TM-402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Assembling the TM-402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2 TM-403 User’s Guide

Preparing the Work Area


Space Requirements
The TM-402 is a table-top machine which needs to be placed on a flat, stable surface in a well lit
work area that is a minimum of 7’ high x 11’ wide x 9‘deep (2.2 m x 3.5 m x 2.7 m) to provide suf-
ficient space for the assembled machine when it is fully loaded with a variety of tape reel sizes.

The TM-402 is pictured mounted on the optional 80/20 Frame in the minimum required work area
below.

Minimum
Height
7 feet

Minimum
Width = 11 feet

Preparing the Work Area D292105.4a.fm


Chapter 1: Assembly & Installation 1- 3

Table Requirements
The TM-402 should be placed on a user-supplied table or bench that is capable of supporting a
minimum of 290 lb. (132 kg). An optional 80/20 frame (pictured above) is also available for
mounting the TM-402.

Choose a table that is at least 52” wide by 36” deep to provide sufficient space for the assembled
machine when it is fully loaded with a variety of tape reel sizes.

Ideally the table height should be adjustable so the machine height can be easily adjusted to suit
operators of varying heights. The objective is to position the TM-402 controls so they are easily
accessible for operation and maintenance. The suggested level is 36” (900 mm) above the floor,
but this may vary from one operator to another.

The table’s working surface should have a slope of no more than 5 degrees. Ensure that the TM-
402 feet is positioned on a table or the optional 80/20 frame so the machine is fully supported,
immobilized and level during operation.

Clearance
Allow at least three feet of clearance on all sides of the machine for easy access and operation.
A birds-eye view of the TM-402 with minimum clearance on all sides is shown below.

Minimum Work
Space Depth
9 feet x 11 feet

Minimum clearance
3’ on all sides

D292105.4a.fm Preparing the Work Area


1-4 TM-403 User’s Guide

When positioning the TM-402, choose an area that is not located below overhead gantries, walk-
ways or power lines to ensure objects or liquids cannot be dropped on the machine from over-
head.

Power Requirements
The TM-402 will also require access to a 85-110 PSI air pressure system and a 240 VAC, 50/60
Hz power supply. Locate the machine so electrical power cables can be routed away from areas
where personnel are expected to move.

Note: It is recommended that cables be routed overhead or underground. If cables must


be routed over the floor, cover them with rubber ramps.

Preparing the Work Area D292105.4a.fm


Chapter 1: Assembly & Installation 1- 5

Unpacking the TM-402


Prior to shipment, the TM-402 is partially disassembled, then shrink wrapped, placed in a crate,
and strapped to the crate floor. The disassembled TM-402 parts, which include the Carrier Tape
Arm, the Take-up Assembly, the Bowl Feeder and the Spare Parts Kit, are individually bubble-
wrapped and packed around the base machine. The TM-402 crate should contain the base
machine along with the following items:

A. 240 Volt Bowl Feeder

B. Carrier Tape Arm

C. Take-up Arm

D. 80/20 Frame (optional, shipped disassembled)

E. Laptop Computer (optional, not pictured)

A User’s Guide, Standard and Metric Hex Wrench Sets, and a Spare Parts Kit are also
included but not pictured above.

Note: Bowl appearance will vary depending on part size to be processed and the bowl
which was selected at the time of purchase.

D292105.4a.fm Unpacking the TM-402


1-6 TM-403 User’s Guide

Assembling the TM-402

Equipment Required
• Adjustable wrench (needs to fit 1 1/16” to 1 3/32” nut)
• Standard and Metric Hex Wrench Sets (provided with machine)
• 85-110 PSI air pressure system

Note: Read the TM-402 User’s Guide before assembling the TM-402.

Unpack the TM-402 Crate


1. Move the Crate to the Work Area. Use a fork lift to move the TM-402 crate to the pre-
pared work area. Ensure the fork is centered under the crate before lifting.

Note: Use a forklift with a minimum load capacity of 300 pounds (136 kg) and a fork
length that is a minimum of 40 inches (102 cm) so the fork fully extends beyond the crate
on the other side. The forklift should only be operated by a licensed/certified operator.

2, Unpack the Crate.

a. Remove the top and sides from the TM-402 crate. Set aside.

b. The TM-402 is shipped partially disassembled, with the Bowl Feeder, Take-up Arm
and Carrier Tape/Feed Arm detached and wrapped in bubble wrap. Remove the smaller
items one at a time from the crate and place on a flat, stable surface for assembly.

c. Remove and discard the protective wrapping from each part.

Assembling the TM-402 D292105.4a.fm


Chapter 1: Assembly & Installation 1- 7

3. Remove the TM-402 from the Crate.

a. The TM-402 is bolted to the bottom of the crate for shipping. Reach below the crate to
unfasten the bolts.

Note: If the optional 80/20 Frame was purchased, follow the assembly instructions in the
80/20 Frame Exploded Views document which can be found in the Exploded Views sec-
tion at the end of this manual before proceeding.

b. Moving the TM-402 Base Machine. The machine may be manually lifted from the
crate. The base machine weighs 265 lb. (120 Kg) so the task will require four people.

Lift Points

Position one person at each corner of the machine using the lift points illustrated above to
safely distribute the machine’s weight. Lift the machine from the crate and place it onto
the prepared work table/bench.

4. Position the TM-402 in the work area so there is at least 3 feet of clearance on all sides.
(See the Preparing the Work Area section earlier in this chapter for details.)

5. The TM-402 is shipped with zip ties securing the pick head, the 2D Camera and any
mobile portions of the machine. Cut and remove all zip ties.

D292105.4a.fm Assembling the TM-402


1-8 TM-403 User’s Guide

Re-assemble the TM-402

1. Position the Tower Light

Lift Tower Light, snapping it in place in an upright position perpendicular to the TM-402.

2. Connecting the Carrier Tape Arm

a. Remove the black knob from the right side of the Track Support Bracket.

Assembling the TM-402 D292105.4a.fm


Chapter 1: Assembly & Installation 1- 9

b. The Carrier Tape Arm has a dowel pin which locks into position holes on the Track
Support Bracket. Slide the Carrier Tape Arm onto the threaded rod, engage the dowel pin
into the desired position, and secure it into place with the black knob.

Knob

Position Holes

4. Positioning the Take-up Arm

a. The Take-up Arm has a dowel pin which


locks into position holes on the Track Sup-
port Bracket. Loosen the black knob on the
back of the Take-up Arm and position it at
about a 45 degree angle from the baseplate
assembly. Engage the dowel pin into the
desired position and secure it into place with
the black knob..

b. Plug the electrical connector into the


take-up motor receptacle.

D292105.4a.fm Assembling the TM-402


1-10 TM-403 User’s Guide

5. Connect the Air Supply..

a. Attach the air supply line to the air regula-


tor, then connect it to the air supply.

b. Set the regulator to 85 psi, if necessary. It


can be adjusted by lifting the adjustment knob
and turning it. Once it reads 85 psi, push the
knob back in to lock it into place.

NOTE: It is recommended that the air hose be Connect


routed overhead or underground. If it must be Air Line
routed over the floor, cover the hose with rub- Here
ber ramps.

6. Inspect the TM-402.

a. Inspect the fully assembled TM-402, verifying that all twist ties have been removed
and all cables are secure.

b. Connect the power cord to the power


receptacle on the back of the TM-402, then
connect the other end to a 240 Volt single
phase power supply

Note: It is recommended that the power cord


be routed overhead or underground. If it must
be routed over the floor, cover the cords with
rubber ramps.

Protective earth grounding of the TM-402 is included in the manufacture of the TM-402 at
V-TEK. The TM-402 is fully tested before shipping. No further grounding or testing is
required during re-assembly and installation.

The TM-402 is ready to power up. Follow the instructions in Chapter 3: Machine Setup to setup
the machine for operation.

Assembling the TM-402 D292105.4a.fm


Chapter 2: Machine Overview

Contents

Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2


Right Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Controls, Connections & Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
The Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Pick & Place Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Bowl Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2D Vision System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-2 TM-403 User’s Guide

Front View

G
J
E
H
A M N
C

I
B D F

A. Take-up Arm H. Vision System


B. Air Regulator I. Taper Track
C. Idler Wheel J. Pick & Place Head Assembly & Bridge
D. Drive Sprocket K. Touch Screen HMI
E. Cover Tape Arm L. Tower Light
F. Heat/PSA Sealer M. Air Pressure Gauge & Control
G. Sensor Amplifiers N. Carrier Tape Arm

Front View D292105.5b.fm


Chapter 2: TM-403 Overview 2-3

Right Side View

D
F
E

A. Tower Light E. Taper Input


B. Pick & Place Head Enclosure F. Bowl Feeder
C. Carrier Tape Arm G. Main Power Switch
D. Carrier Tape Arm Adjustment Knob

D292105.5b.fm Right Side View


2-4 TM-403 User’s Guide

Left Side View

A H
B
B
B
J

G
C

E F

D K

A. Pick & Place Head Assembly G. Take-up Arm


B. Enclosure Doors (3) H. Cover Tape Arm
C. Bowl Feeder I. Tower Light
D. Air Regulator J. Heat/PSA Sealer
E. Take-up Motor Connection K. Reset Button
F. Take-up Arm Adjustment Knob L. Emergency Stop Switch

Left Side View D292105.5b.fm


Chapter 2: TM-403 Overview 2-5

Back View

J
H S
A
K
B
E L
G
M
I R
C
N
Q
K O T
P
D

A. Carrier Tape Arm K. Pick Head Jog Buttons


B. Carrier Arm Adjustment Knob L. Heat/PSA Sealer
C. Main Power Switch M. Bowl Feeder
D. Fuse Holders (Bowl application only) N. Amplitude Adjustment Knobs
E. Pick Head Enclosure O. Ethernet Connection
F. Tower Light P. Keyence Monitor Connection
G. Pick & Place Head Assembly Q. Bowl Feeder Power Connection
H. 2D Vision System R. Air Pressure Regulator
I. Taper Assembly S. Take-up Arm
J. Cover Tape Arm T. Power Receptacle

D292105.5b.fm Back View


2-6 TM-403 User’s Guide

Controls, Connections & Labeling

Reset Button
The TM-402’s blue Reset Button is located on the left side of the machine
below the Take-up Arm. (pictured below)

Emergency Stop Switch


The Emergency Stop Switch is located on the left side of the machine below
the blue Reset Button. (pictured above)

Controls, Connections & Labeling D292105.5b.fm


Chapter 2: TM-403 Overview 2-7

Main Power Switch


The Main Power Switch is located on the right side of the machine behind the
Carrier Tape Arm on the lower sheet metal enclosure.

Serial Plate
This is an example of the Serial Plate which is
permanently affixed to the back of the TM-
402. It includes basic machine information
such as machine weight, power usage and
short circuit rating. The Serial Plate also docu-
ments machine specific information such as
the machine’s model name, date of manufac-
ture and unique serial number

D292105.5b.fm Controls, Connections & Labeling


2-8 TM-403 User’s Guide

The Taper

G
F
H
E N
A
D I L
J M
B
C K

A. Take-up Arm H. Sensor Amplifiers


B. Take-up Guide I. Cover Tape Guide
C. Drive Sprocket J. Heat/PSA Sealer
D. Idler Wheel K. Tape Jam Sensor
E. Sealer Controls & Pressure Gauge L. Adjustable Width Track
F. Cover Tape Reel M. Carrier Tape Guide
G. Low Cover Sensor N. Carrier Tape Arm

Taper Controls

C D

A. Pick Head Jog Buttons


B. Take-up Tension Control
C. Sealer Air Pressure Control
D. Sealer Air Pressure Gauge
E. Inside Seal Position Lock/Adjust

The Taper D292105.5b.fm


Chapter 2: TM-403 Overview 2-9

Taper: Sealer

D L
C H

A
K
J

I K
E
F

A. Idler Wheel G. Heat Sealer


B. Drive Sprocket H. PSA Pressure Wheels
C. Outer Seal Lock I. PSA Pressure Adjustment Screws
D. Outer Seal Adjuster J. Cover Tape Guide
E. Inner Seal Lock K. Tape Jam Sensors
F. Inner Seal Adjust L. Cover Tape Width Adjusters

D292105.5b.fm The Taper


2-10 TM-403 User’s Guide

Pick & Place Assembly

Pick & Place Head

C B

A
A. Nozzle D. Pick Actuator Adjustment Screw
B. Nozzle Vacuum Sensor E. Place Actuator Adjustment Screw
C. Nozzle Vacuum Filter

Pick & Place Controls

A B
A. Blow-off Air Pressure Gauge & Control B. Nozzle Vacuum Sensor

Pick & Place Assembly D292105.5b.fm


Chapter 2: TM-403 Overview 2-11

Bowl Feeder

B
C

A. Bowl
B. Linear Track
C. Nest
D. Part Present Sensors
E. Amplifiers
F. Bowl Connections E

Note: The Bowl Feeder Assembly’s appearance may vary, depending on the part size
which will be processed and the bowl size which was ordered.

D292105.5b.fm Bowl Feeder


2-12 TM-403 User’s Guide

2D Vision System

The Keyence IV Vision system consists of the following components shown below.

A
C

A. Adjustable Mounting Bracket F. Status LED


B. Position Adjustment Knobs G. Ethernet Traffic Indicator
C. Power & I/O Connector H. Keyence IV-G Camera
D. Ethernet Connector I. Lens Cover/Focus Ring
E. M12 Ethernet Cable (not shown)

Note: For advanced Vision configuration, a computer is required. This can be provided by
the user or purchased as an option from V-TEK, Inc. System requirements for the vision
computer follow:
• Operating system: Microsoft® Windows 7TM (32 or 64 bit)

• 128 MB RAM

• 1024 x 768 (96 DPI) or 1280 x 1024 (120 DPI display

• Ethernet port

2D Vision System D292105.5b.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface

Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
HMI Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Job Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Job Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Taper Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sealer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Head Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Bowl Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Run Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
3-2 TM-403 User’s Guide

Introduction
This chapter gives an overview of the TM-402 Human Machine Interface (HMI), defining the but-
tons, screens and setting options that allow the operator to customize the TM-402’s performance
to their taping needs.

Note: Proceed to Chapter 4: Setup for instructions on how to configure the HMI and to
Chapter 5: Operation for instructions on how to run a job

Touch Screen
The user interacts with the TM-402 through a touch screen HMI which is located on the front of
the machine below the taper. Touching the HMI screen has the same effect as a left click with the
mouse. Although only lightly touching the buttons or data fields is necessary for activation, the
action is referred to as “pressing” in this manual.

Note: Use care when operating the touch screen and do not use any objects other than a
finger to touch the screen. A stylus can also be used to click the various buttons.

HMI Tabs
When the TM-402 is powered on, the user interface opens to the Job Tab. The Job Tab is pic-
tured above as it appears when the motors have been homed.

The Tab Menu is located on the left side of all screens. There are five tabs on the TM-402 HMI:
Job, Taper, Head, Bowl and Run. These tabs allow the user to configure pick head, taper, bowl
feeder and job settings and to run jobs.

To navigate between tabs, press the desired tab name on the Tab Menu and the selected tab will
open. The active tab button is shaded blue. In the example on the above, the Job Tab is
selected.

Introduction D292105.6a.fm
Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-3

Each tab contains a variety of toggle buttons and open fields. Press any field to open a numeric
or alpha-numeric keypad and enter the appropriate information.

D292105.6a.fm Introduction
3-4 TM-403 User’s Guide

Job Tab
When the TM-402 is initially powered up, the HMI will open to the Job Tab with a red Home
Required button at the top of the Tab Menu and the other tab buttons grayed out.

Homing motors should be done following every system power up or emergency stop. Press
Home Required to open the Homing Status window.

Press the Home All Motors button to begin the homing sequence. Homing progress is displayed
in the Pick Axis Motor Status Bar.

Job Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-5

As the homing sequence is completed, the bar gradually turns from black to green. A Homing
Succeeded! message appears at the end of the sequence.

If a problem arises during homing of the motor, the status bar will turn red and a Homing Failed
message will appear.

D292105.6a.fm Job Tab


3-6 TM-403 User’s Guide

Pressing the Left Arrow button in the Homing Screen will open the Run Tab.

Select the Job Tab from the Tab Menu to navigate back to the Job Tab.

Job Tab Overview


The Job Tab allows the user to select a pre-programmed job, change job information and move
to the other tab screens. It also features an easy-to-use Job Wizard which leads the user through
the job set-up process. The Job Tab is pictured below.

A. Press any tab in the Tab Menu to open that tab window.

B. The Job Library holds up to fifty saved jobs (Job 1 through Job 50). The Up and
Down Arrows buttons to the right of the Job Library are used to move through the
job list one job at a time. The Page Up and Page Down Arrows buttons to the left

Job Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-7

of the Job Library are used to move through the job list five jobs at a time. The
Enter button selects and highlights a job from the Job Library list so it can be
opened or saved.

C. The Job Information section has two open fields for entering job information: Job
Quantity and Job Description. Press the field to open a keypad for data entry. The
maximum number of characters for any field is 20.

D. At the bottom of the Job Tab there are three control buttons:

• The Open button opens the currently selected job.


• The Save button is used to save current job settings for future use.
• The Job Wizard button opens the Job Wizard, allowing the user to configure job
settings.

Job Wizard
Pressing the Job Wizard button in the Job Tab opens the Job Wizard. The Job Wizard has 13
screens that lead the user through the job set-up process. Instructions at the top of each Job
Wizard screen explain each step. The Arrow buttons on the bottom of the window move the user
forward and backwards through the process. Pressing the right Arrow button opens the next Job
Wizard screen. Pressing the left Arrow opens the previous screen.

1. In the first Job Wizard screen the user resets the job to initialize the system. Press Reset
Job, then press the right Arrow key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

Job Wizard Step 1

Arrow Buttons

D292105.6a.fm Job Tab


3-8 TM-403 User’s Guide

2. In the second Job Wizard screen the user enters the Quantity of parts that will be run and
a brief Description of the job. When the job parameters are set, press the right Arrow
key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

Job Wizard Step 2

Arrow Buttons

3. The third Job Wizard step sets up Taper operation.

Job Wizard Step 3

A
D
B

C D

Job Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-9

A. Tape Pitch is determined by the carrier tape


selected. Use the Pitch Setting Guide on the taper to
determine the correct pitch. Press the Tape Pitch
field to open a keypad and type in the desired value.

B. The Continuous Advance button advances the


tape through the Taper. It will continue to advance
until Continuous Advance is pressed a second time.

C. Seal Type toggles between PSA and Heat seal, select correct seal type.

D. The Set Point fields are only active when Heat Seal is selected. These fields are
used to set the desired temperature for the Inner and Outer Sealer. Enter the cor-
rect value in both fields, then press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job
Wizard screen.

Note: The TM-402 accommodates a wide range of carrier tapes and cover tapes. Set-
tings may vary from one tape product to another. The recommended starting point is 90°
C. The maximum recommended operating temperature is 160° C. The temperature for
each seal shoe should be increased or decreased as needed after running a peel force
test.

4. The fourth Job Wizard screen enables or disables the tape Leader.

Job Wizard Step 4

A. Leader State toggles between Enabled and Disabled.

B. When the Leader State is set to Enabled, pressing the Leader Length field will
open a keypad. Type in the desired value, then press the right Arrow Key to
move to the next Job Wizard screen.

D292105.6a.fm Job Tab


3-10 TM-403 User’s Guide

5. The next six Job Wizard screens are used to set the Nozzle positions at the Pick and
Place locations. The first is shown below.
Job Wizard Step 5

A B

A. Press the Jog buttons to move the Pick Head to the Bowl Feeder, centering it over
the Linear Track’s Nest in the pick position.

B. Adjust the Jog Step in the Head Jog Step field, if necessary.

C. Once the Pick Head is centered over the pick position, press Learn. The current
Nozzle position will be saved as the pick position for the current job and the
Learned Position will update to match the Current Position on the screen.

Job Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-11

9. Press the right arrow key to move to the next screen.


Job Wizard Step 6

A. Press Pick Extend to lower the Nozzle to the Nest. The button will change to Pick
Retract.

Note: Follow the directions in Chapter 4: Setup for manually adjusting the Pick Actuator
to set the correct Nozzle Height.

B. Once the nozzle height has been set, press Pick Retract to raise the Nozzle to its
original height. Index the Nozzle until it is once again at the origin position.

D292105.6a.fm Job Tab


3-12 TM-403 User’s Guide

10. Press the right arrow key to move to the next screen.
Job Wizard Step 7

A. Press Pick Part to pick a part from the nest.

B. If no rotation is required for part picking, skip this step. If part rotation is required
for picking, press Rotate Part to rotate the Nozzle 90°.

Note: Follow the directions in Chapter 4: Setup for manually adjusting the Solenoid to set
Pick Head Rotation.

11. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

Job Wizard Step 8

A
B

Job Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-13

A. The Arrow keys allow the user to jog the Pick Head and Carrier Tape forward or
backward in small preset increments. This is useful for centering the Nozzle in the
pick and place positions.

The Up/Down Arrow keys move the Pick Head forward and backward.

The Left/Right Arrow keys move the tape left and right in the Taper Track.

B. Enter the value in millimeters for the Head Jog Step and Taper Jog Step fields.

C. Pressing Set Place Position saves the current Nozzle position as the Place posi-
tion for the current job and the Learned Position will update to match the Current
Position on the screen. In the bottom right corner of the screen the right Arrow
key will appear.

12. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

Job Wizard Step 9

A. Press Place Extend to lower the Nozzle to the Carrier Tape Pocket.

Note: The Place Extend button toggles between Place Extend and Place
Retract. Once Place Extend has been pressed, the button will change to
Place Retract.

Follow the directions in Chapter 4: Setup for manually adjusting the place Actuator
to set the correct Nozzle Height at the Place position.

D292105.6a.fm Job Tab


3-14 TM-403 User’s Guide

13. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.
Job Wizard Step 10

A. Enter the placement angle which was manually set in Step 10. The options are 0,
-90 and +90.

In the photo below, a part is shown at the pick position as viewed from the front of
the machine.

Rotation Options

-90

0
+90

• If rotation is set at 0, the part will be placed in the same orientation as it was
picked.

• If rotation is set at -90, the part will be rotated 90 degrees clockwise prior to
placement.

• If rotation is set at +90, the part will be rotated 90 degrees counter-clockwise


prior to placement.

Job Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-15

14. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.
Job Wizard Step 11

A. Test the job settings, using the Pick Part and Place Part buttons to pick and place
parts.

B. If adjustment are required, use the left Arrow key to return to the desired step and
adjust settings until the TM-402 picks and places parts as desired.

15. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.
Job Wizard Step 12

A
B

A. Select the Camera State to Enabled and Disabled as desired.

D292105.6a.fm Job Tab


3-16 TM-403 User’s Guide

B. If the camera is enabled, enter the number of pockets between the Place point
and the Inspection point in the Parts Until Inspection field. Begin the count with
the Place position as zero so the Place pocket is not included in the count.

16. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the final Job Wizard screen.
Job Wizard Step 13

B C

A. Browse through the Job Library using the Up/Down Arrow keys to move up or
down through the list. To select a Job Name from the list, press the Enter key.

Note: The Save function will overwrite the information stored for the currently selected
job. Therefore, it is important to select the desired job prior to pressing the Save button.

B. Press the Save button to save job settings to the selected job name.

C. Press Finish to close the Job Wizard and return to the Job Tab.

Job Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-17

Taper Tab
The Taper Tab allows the user to adjust taper settings by leading them through four Taper Setup
screens.

1. The first screen of the Taper Tab is shown below.


Taper Screen 1

A
C
B

A. Press any tab in the Tab Menu to open that tab window.

B. Tape Speed is a percentage of the maximum velocity the carrier tape can be
advanced at. It can be set between 1-10.

Tape Pitch is determined by the carrier


tape selected. Use the Pitch Setting Guide
on the taper to determine the correct pitch.

Jog Step sets the distance in millimeters


the carrier tape will move forward or back-
ward each time a Jog button is pressed.

Note: The Jog Step field requires the value to be


entered in the following format: XX.XX. (i.e. 60.00).

C. The Jog buttons in the Index Settings section jog the tape forward or backward
along the Taper Track.

The Pocket Advance button advances the tape one pocket at a time. The speed
at which the tape advances is set in the Tape Speed field.

D292105.6a.fm Taper Tab


3-18 TM-403 User’s Guide

The Continuous Advance button advances the tape through the Taper and onto
the take-up reel. It will continue to advance until Continuous Advance is pressed
a second time.

Note: Continuous Advance is useful for creating a trailer or loading tape at the begin-
ning of a job.

2. Pressing the right Arrow button opens the next Taper Setup screen which focuses on
Vision Setup.
Taper Screen 2

A. The Camera State button toggles between Enabled and Disabled.

The Parts Until Inspection value is the number of pockets between the Place
point and the Inspection point. Begin the count at the Place position at zero, so
the Place position is not included.

B. Pressing the Trigger button triggers the 2D Camera to inspect the part which is
currently at the Inspection point. The box to the right of the Trigger button will dis-
play a green PASS message or a red FAIL message.

Note: For more detailed inspection configuration and procedures, see the Cognex
Checker User’s Guide which was included with the TM-402.

Pressing the right Arrow button opens the next Taper Setup screen.

Taper Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-19

3. The third Taper Setup screen focuses on Sealer Settings. It will vary in appearance
depending on the type of sealer selected. In the example below, the selected Seal Type is
Heat.
Taper Screen 3

A B

A. The Seal Type button toggles between Heat seal and PSA seal.

The Dwell Time field is only active when heat seal is enabled. Dwell time refers to
the amount of time that the Heat Seal Shoes are in contact with the Cover Tape.
Enter the desired dwell time in milliseconds in this field.

The Manual Seal button activates the sealer to perform one seal.

B. The Set Point field allows the user to select the Heat Sealer set point, or target
temperature. Press the field to open the keypad, then enter the desired tempera-
ture in degrees Celsius.

The Measured field shows the current Heat Sealer temperature in degrees Cel-
sius.

Note: The TM-402 accommodates a wide range of carrier tapes and cover tapes. Set-
tings may vary from one tape product to another. The recommended starting point is 90°
C. The maximum recommended operating temperature is 160° C. The temperature for
each seal shoe should be increased or decreased as needed after running a peel force
test.

D292105.6a.fm Taper Tab


3-20 TM-403 User’s Guide

4. Pressing the right Arrow button in the third Taper Setup screens opens the final Taper
Setup screen. The fourth Taper Setup screen focuses on Leader and Sensor settings.

Taper Screen 4

A. The Tape Jam Sensor Enabled/Disabled button turns the Tape Jam Sensor on
and off. The Tape Jam Sensor registers a tape jam whenever something pro-
trudes above the top of the carrier tape pocket. This might be caused by a mis-
placed part, a pocket that has been loaded with two parts or by a buckle in the
tape.

When the Tape Jam Sensor is activated, the job that is being run is paused and
an error message appears on the HMI screen. The recommended setting for the
Tape Jam Sensor is Enabled.

The Low Cover Sensor Enabled/ Disabled button turns the Low Cover Tape Sen-
sor on and off. The Low Cover Tape Sensor detects when the cover tape reel is
running low. When the Low Cover Tape Sensor is activated, an error message
appears on the HMI screen. The recommended setting for the Low Cover Tape
Sensor is Enabled.

Note: The Low Cover error message is only displayed once during a job.

B. When Leader State is enabled, the TM-402 will create a leader of the specified
length at the end of the job.

The Leader Length field is only active when Leader State is enabled. Enter the
desired leader length in millimeters in the field.

Note: The TM-402 will use these settings for the current job. To save Taper Settings for
future jobs, go to the Job Tab, select a job name and Save. If settings are not saved, all
data is lost when the TM-402 is powered off.

Taper Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-21

Head Tab
The three Head Setup Tab screens allow the user to set pick and place head positions, head
speed, and blow off time. There are also buttons that allow the user to manually pick, place and
rotate parts.

1. Head Screen 1 is used to position the head.

Head Screen 1

A. Press any tab in the Tab Menu to open that tab window.

B. The Move To Pick button moves the head to the preset Pick Positions.

The Move To Place button moves the pick head to the preset Place Position.

The Pick Part button moves the head from its current location and picks a part
from the programmed pick location. It then returns the nozzle to its Ready
(retracted) position.

The Place Part button moves the head from its current location and places a part
into the programmed place position.

D292105.6a.fm Head Tab


3-22 TM-403 User’s Guide

2. Press the right Arrow button to open the second Head Setup screen (shown below).
Head Screen 2

B
C

A. The Set Pick button saves the current position as the pick position.

The Set Place button saves the current position as the place position.

The user can either jog the head to the correct position or click inside the location
field to the left of the Set buttons and manually enter the correct position. Once
the correct position is entered, press the Set Pick/Place Position button to save
it.

If the position has been learned, the status color after the button will appear
green. If not learned, the status color will appear red. In the screen above, both
the Pick Position and the Place Position have not been learned.

B. The Jog buttons jog the head forward or backward along the X Axis (forward/
backward).

Head Speed is a percentage of the maximum velocity. It can be set between 1-10.

Jog Step is the distance in millimeters that the head will move when Jog is
pressed.

Note: The Jog Step field requires the value to be entered in the following format: XX.XX.
(i.e. 60.00).

C. The Current Position message show the location of the pick head in relation to
the Home position (when the head is closest to the front of the machine). For
example when the pick head is homed, the current position will be 0.00. This dis-
tance is measured in millimeters.

Head Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-23

3. Press the right Arrow button to open the second Head Setup screen (shown below).
Head Screen 3

A. The Pick Extend/Pick Retract button actuates the pick solenoid to enable the
operator to set the pick height.

The Rotate Part button rotates the pick head to the preset rotation angle.

The Place Extend/Place Retract button actuates the place solenoid to enable the
operator to set the place height.

B. The Part Placement Rotation Angle is manually set during machine setup. The
options are 0, -90 and +90.

Rotation Options

-90

+90

• If rotation is set at 0, the part will be placed in the same orientation as it was
picked.

D292105.6a.fm Head Tab


3-24 TM-403 User’s Guide

• If rotation is set at -90, the part will be rotated 90 degrees clockwise prior to
placement.

• If rotation is set at +90, the part will be rotated 90 degrees counter-clockwise


prior to placement.

Nozzle Blow Off Time is the amount of time in milliseconds that the nozzle will
activate the blow-off pressure to place a part in the Taper.

C. Press the left Arrow button to return to the second Head Setup screen or press a
button on the Tab Menu to move to a new tab.

Note: The TM-402 will use these settings for the current job. To save Head Settings for
future jobs, go to the Job Tab, select a job name and Save.

Head Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-25

Bowl Tab
The Bowl Setup Tabs allows the user to configure vacuum and vibratory settings for the Bowl
Feeder and Linear Track.

1. Bowl Screen 1 allows the user to configure Linear Track and Nest settings as desired..
Bowl Screen 1

A. Press any tab in the Tab Menu to open that tab window.

B. The Linear Vibratory button turns the Linear Track Vibratory to Enabled or Dis-
abled to fill the Linear Track.

C. The Arrow button advances the user to the next Bowl Tab screen.

D292105.6a.fm Bowl Tab


3-26 TM-403 User’s Guide

2. Bowl Screen 2 allows the user to set timers and delays..


Bowl Screen 2

A. Press any tab in the Tab Menu to open that tab window.

B. Bowl On Delay is used to set the length of time in seconds between when the
Track Full Sensor detects that there are no parts in the track and when the bowl is
turned on to feed parts. The minimum recommended setting for Bowl On Delay is
one second.

Bowl Off Delay is used to set the length of time in seconds between when the
Track Full Sensor first detects a part in the nest and when the bowl is automati-
cally turned off.

The Linear Track’s Nest has a sensor which detects when parts are present. The
Empty Nest Timer setting is the time in milliseconds the Empty Nest Timer
should wait before it beeps to indicate parts are not loading in the nest.

Track Off Delay is the time in seconds that the vibratory will continue to vibrate
the track after the machine is stopped.

Note: The TM-402 will use these settings for the current job. To save Bowl Feeder Set-
tings for future jobs, go to the Job Tab, select a job name and Save.

Bowl Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-27

Run Tab
When Run is selected from the Tab Menu, the Run Tab opens. It includes job information, cur-
rent job statistics, Status messages and Run control buttons. The Run Screen with all status
messages displayed appears below.

A B C

A. Press any tab in the Tab Menu to open that tab window.

B. The Job Information section has two fields: Quantity and Job Description. This
information was entered in the Job Wizard during job setup. The Job Description
field is greyed out, indicating it cannot be altered in this tab. To edit the Quantity
field, press anywhere inside the field to open a keypad for data entry.

C. There are four control buttons on the Run Tab: Run/Running, Stop/Stopped,
Reset Job, and System Homing.

• The Run and Stop buttons start and stop job processing. They change color to
indicate they are active. In the Run Tab above, the red Stopped button indi-
cates the current job has been stopped.

• The Reset Job button resets all job statistics to zero. This is useful for running
multiple reels of the same job.

When Reset Job is pressed, the following message appears.

D292105.6a.fm Run Tab


3-28 TM-403 User’s Guide

• The System Homing button allows the user to home the motor. Homing motors
should be done once following every system power up. When System Homing is
selected, the Homing Status window will appear.

Pressing the Home All Motors button begins the homing sequence. Homing
progress is displayed in the Pick Axis Motor Status Bar.

As the homing sequence is completed, the bar gradually turns from black to
green. A Homing Succeeded! message appears at the end of the sequence.

Run Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface 3-29

If a problem arises during homing for the motor, the status bar will turn red and a
Homing Error message will appear.

Pressing the Left Arrow button returns the user to the Run Tab.

D. The Statistics section keeps a running tally of the current job’s Parts Placed, Run
Time, and Parts Per Hour.

E. Status Messages only appear when conditions exist which require the user’s
attention before the job can be run.

• If the preset quantity of parts has been processed, the End Of Job message will
appear.

• If the Doors are open, the Doors Open message will appear.

D292105.6a.fm Run Tab


3-30 TM-403 User’s Guide

Run Tab D292105.6a.fm


Chapter 4: Setup

Contents
Quick Start: Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Power Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Home Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Load the Bowl Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Nozzle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Selecting the Correct Nozzle & Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Installing Nozzle & Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Taper Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Load Carrier Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Load Cover Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Load Take-up Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Configure HMI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Test Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
4-2 TM-403 User’s Guide

Quick Start: Setup


The following is an outline of the basic steps required to setup the TM-402 for operation.
More detailed instructions follow in the next section of this chapter.

Caution: Users should always wear protective eye wear when operat-
ing or maintaining the TM-402.

1. Power up
• Power up the machine. Press Reset. Close all doors.

2. Home the motors


• Press Home Required and Home All Motors.

3. Load the Bowl Feeder


• Load components into the Bowl Feeder.

4. Install Nozzle
• Ensure correct nozzle size and tip are installed.

5. Load Taper
• Load carrier tape.
• Load cover tape.
• Place an empty reel on the Take-up Arm.
6. Configure HMI settings
• Go to the Job Tab and run the Job Wizard to configure job settings.

7. Test Sealer
• Perform a Seal Test to ensure a good seal, adjust Sealer settings as necessary.

8. Setup 2D Vision
• Connect
• Setup 2D Vision Inspection.

Quick Start: Setup D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 3

Step 1: Power Up the System


Power
Up 1. Power up the machine by turning the Main Power control on the
lower right side of the cabinet to the ON position.

2. Press the blue Reset Button on the left side of the machine.

There will be a brief popping sound as the Air Dump Valve


releases air to the machine. As the TM-402 powers up the PLC,
Servo Drivers and HMI Monitor will boot up. On top of the
machine, the Tower Light will flash red indicating the machine is
on but not running.

Note: The boot up process takes approximately 2 minutes.

The monitor will display the HMI Job Tab with a red Home Required message at
the top of the Tab Menu.

D292105.7b.fm Power Up the System


4-4 TM-403 User’s Guide

Home Motors
Step 2:
Home Note: The TM-402 needs to be homed once after each power up or Emergency
Motors Stop activation. The HMI will prompt the operator to home the motors whenever it
is required. Once the motors have been homed, they remain homed until the
machine is powered down or the E-Stop is activated.

1. Press the red Home Required button at the top of the Tab Menu.

2. The TM-402 motor homing sequence begins with the pick head moving slowly to
the right towards the taper (X Axis movement).

When the head has stopped moving, homing is complete.

Home Motors D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 5

Step 3: Load the Bowl Feeder


Load the
Bowl Feeder

1. To prepare the Bowl Feeder for operation, ensure the correct Bowl and Linear
Track are installed for the part which will be run.

2. Load the Bowl with parts. Do not overfill.

3. On the HMI, select Bowl from the tab menu on the left to open the Bowl Setup
Tab..

4. Enable the Linear Vibratory. The Linear Track will turn on and activate the Bowl

5. Manually adjust the Vibratory Controls for Linear Track and Bowl as needed to
suit the type of component that is being processed. Parts should move fluidly into
the track and on to the nest.

D292105.7b.fm Load the Bowl Feeder


4-6 TM-403 User’s Guide

7. Click the right Arrow to move to the second Bowl Setup Screen..

8. Set the desired times in milliseconds for Bowl On Delay, Bowl Off Delay, Empty
Nest Timer and Track Off Delay.

The Bowl Feeder is now ready to operate. Feeder settings will be configured later
in this chapter in the Job Wizard section.

Load the Bowl Feeder D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 7

Step 4: Nozzle Installation


Nozzle
Installation The TM-402’s is shipped with the following nozzles and nozzle tips:
SELECT
NOZZLE Convum Quad SPT

• (1) Quad Nozzle Shank (Part # 267090)

• (1) Small Precision Tool (SPT) Nozzle Shank (Part # 267091)

• (1) Convum Nozzle Shank (Part # 267008)

• (1) Large Quad Vacuum Cup (Part # 201297)

• (1) Medium Quad Vacuum Cup (Part # 201298)

• (1) Small Quad Vacuum Cup (Part # 201299)

• (1) SPT Vacuum Cup (Part # 201271)

• (1) Convum Vacuum Cup (Part # 201207)

• (2) Nozzle O-Rings (Part # 212025)

Note: Nozzle Tips are available in a wide range of sizes and style. See the Sug-
gested Spare Parts List in the back of this User’s Guide for more details. Contact
V-TEK Service for information on ordering additional Nozzle Tips.

Selecting the Correct Nozzle & Nozzle Tip


To achieve the best picking results, select the largest cup size the part can accommo-
date. Maximizing the cup size gives the vacuum access to more surface area which
increases its pick-up capability. The goal is to use a nozzle cup that is just slightly smaller
than the part being picked.

The Convum bellows-style cups have a flexible flange that are useful for picking irregular
or heavy parts.

D292105.7b.fm Nozzle Installation


4-8 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 4: Installing Nozzle & Nozzle Tip


Nozzle 1. Move the Pick & Place Head to the Place position
Installation so it is easily accessible from the front. .
INSTALL
NOZZLE 2. Remove the air line from the Nozzle Shank, sup-
porting the Nozzle with one hand while gently pull-
ing the tube off the Nozzle Barb.

3. Using a 2mm Hex wrench, loosen the set screw


that retains the Nozzle Shaft.

4. Slide the Nozzle Shank down and remove it from


the Pick & Place Assembly. Store the unused
Nozzle Shank and Nozzle Cup in the Spare Parts
Kit.

5. Select the correct Nozzle Shank and Nozzle Cup


for the part that will be run. Press the Nozzle Cup
onto the Nozzle Shaft.

6. Insert the Nozzle Shank into the Actuator Shaft in


the Pick & Place Assembly.

Note: When positioning the Nozzle Shank,


push it all the way up to the Actuator Shaft,
then pull it back slightly (about 1mm) so the
body of the Nozzle Shank doesn’t rub the body
of the Actuator.

7. Using a 2mm Hex wrench, tighten the set screw to


retain the Nozzle Shaft..

8. Re-attach the air line to the Nozzle Barb.

Nozzle Installation D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 9

Step 5: Taper Setup


Setup
Taper

Loading Tape
The Taper must be loaded with carrier and cover tapes and configured for operation.
Begin by preparing the Taper, then move to the HMI to adjust settings. (Step 7)

Step 5: Load Carrier Tape


1. Check that the taper is set at the correct width for the carrier tape. If not, push or
Setup
pull the outer track in or out as needed, sliding it on the Detent Shafts until it is at
Taper
the required width.
CARRIER
TAPE Detent Shaft

Outer Track

3. Once the track is adjusted, use a strip of the carrier tape as a test to determine if
the setting is correct. The carrier tape should slide through freely, but without
excess play back and forth. Tighten the set screws down again to secure the track
into place.

D292105.7b.fm Taper Setup


4-10 TM-403 User’s Guide

4. Mount the bulk carrier tape reel on the spindle, ensuring that there is sufficient tape
for the batch to be run.The carrier tape should roll off to the left, unwinding from the
top so it will feed right side up into the carrier tape channel underneath the Pick
Head Enclosure.

The sprocket holes of the carrier tape are on the inside for tape widths less than
32mm. Tapes wider than 32mm have holes on both sides.

5. Trim the end of the carrier tape, cutting


between two pockets with a sharp scissors so
the edge is cleanly cut. Cut the edge of the
tape again, cutting through a sprocket hole at
a 45° angle so the tape feeds easily.

6. Guide the carrier tape under the Carrier Tape


Guide and then feed it through the carrier
tape channel under the taper.

Note: A sharp instrument, such as a pair of


tweezers may aid in guiding the carrier tape
into the loading track.

7. Continue to guide the carrier tape forward


through the loading track and the sealer until
it reaches the sprocket.

8. Lift the idler wheel and place the carrier tape


onto the sprocket so that the holes engage
the teeth. Release the idler wheel so that it is
secured in place.

Mechanical Hazard!
Do not attempt to activate the sprocket while tape is being routed
through the sealer. Pinching or entrapment may occur if safety precau-
tions are not observed.

Taper Setup D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 11

Step 5: Load Cover Tape


1. Remove the Reel Lock mechanism and place a reel of cover tape of the correct
Setup
width to match the carrier tape on the cover tape spindle. The tape should unwind
Taper
to the right from the bottom of the reel. Ensure that there is sufficient tape for the
COVER batch to be run. The reel should be pushed onto the holder so that it is flush with
TAPE the back.

2. Replace the Reel Lock and position it so the


reel is supported and spins freely on the
spindle with little or no drag.

Note: To remove the Reel Lock mecha-


nism from the cover tape support arm, sim-
ply pull the two metal disks apart and slide
the Reel Lock off the spindle.

3. Check that the cover tape guide width is adjusted correctly for the cover tape that
will be used. Pull the cover tape down and compare it to the current setting

If the guide is set too wide or too narrow, loosen the red knob set screw and pull or
push the guide in and out until it matches the width of the cover tape with only a
slight amount of extra room..
Width Adjustment Knobs

4. If the cover tape is PSA, attach it to the carrier tape using the adhesive on the
underside of the tape.

If the cover tape is Heat Seal, use blue Permacel tape to attach the cover tape to
the carrier tape just ahead of the cover tape guide.

5. Thread both the carrier tape and cover tape through the cover tape guide sealer
assembly.

Note: A sharp instrument, such as a pair of tweezers may aid in guiding the cover
tape into the sealer.

D292105.7b.fm Taper Setup


4-12 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 5: 6. Adjust the Cover Tape tension, turning the


Setup Tension Adjustment Knob on the back of the
Taper Cover Tape Arm clockwise (in) to increase ten-
TAKE-UP sion. The goal is to tighten the cover tape so
there is not excess freedom in the tape when it
is advanced.

Load Take-up Reel


1. Mount an empty take-up reel on the take-up reel spindle. The width of the reel
must match the width of the carrier tape and its diameter should be large enough
to accommodate the number of components in the taping job.

2. The Take-up Tension Control is located on the front of the Heat Sealer enclosure
next to the Seal Pressure Gauge & Control. Adjust the take-up tension to a rate
that suits the weight of the parts that are being processed, adjusting it so the take-
up motor pulls the sealed tape gently forward.

Mechanical Hazard!
Avoid placing fingers between the carrier tape and the Take-up
Reel when the TM-402 is in operation. Pinching or entrapment
may occur if safety precautions are not observed.

Taper Setup D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 13

Step 6: Configure HMI Settings


Setup
HMI The TM-402’s Job Wizard leads the user through the HMI setup process.
JOB
1. OPEN JOB WIZARD

a. Press the Job Wizard button to open the Job Wizard.

2. RESET JOB

a. Press Reset Job to initialize system for Job Wizard.

b. Press the right Arrow key to open the next Job Wizard screen.

D292105.7b.fm Configure HMI Settings


4-14 TM-403 User’s Guide

3. ENTER JOB PARAMETERS.

a. Enter Job Quantity

b. Enter Job Description. Press the right Arrow key to open the next Job Wizard
screen.

Step 6: 4. TAPER SETUP


Setup HMI Enter Pitch, Seal Type. If Heat Seal Type is selected, enter Sealer Set Points.
TAPER

Configure HMI Settings D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 15

Step 6: a. Enter the correct tape pitch for the carrier


Setup HMI tape that will be run. If unsure, use the
TAPER Pitch Setting Guide on the Taper to
determine the pitch.

b. Select PSA or Heat Seal.

c. If Heat Seal is enabled, enter the desired


temperature in degrees Celsius for both
the Inner and Outer Sealer Temperature
Settings. Allow the heat sealer to reach
its operating temperature before
continuing.

Note: The TM-402 accommodates a wide


range of carrier tapes and cover tapes. Set-
tings may vary from one tape product to
another. The recommended starting point is
90° C. The maximum recommended operat-
ing temperature is 160° C. The temperature
for each seal shoe should be increased or
decreased as needed after running a peel
force test.

d. Set the heat shoe Seal Pressure to the


appropriate setting. This setting controls
the amount of force applied when the
sealer shoes drop. The recommended
starting point is 50 psi.

e. Press the Continuous Advance button.

The taping module will begin the advance


of the carrier tape and cover tape through
the sealer. The cover tape will be sealed
onto the carrier tape as it advances.

f. Observe whether the sealer’s width is


adjusted correctly for the cover tape. It
should seal just inside the outside edges
of the carrier tape without going off the
edges or over the pockets. If it is not, stop
the taper by pressing the Continuous
Advance button again.

D292105.7b.fm Configure HMI Settings


4-16 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 6: The sealer’s inside and outside Position Locks Inner Seal Adjust
Setup HMI seals are independently
TAPER adjustable. If one of the seals
needs to be moved, loosen the
corresponding position lock and
turn the adjusters.

Turning the wheel counter-


clockwise will move the guide
towards the operator. Turning it
clockwise will move the guide
closer to the machine. Adjust
the Inner Seal Adjust and the
Outer Seal Adjust to the desired Outer Seal Adjust
position, then tighten the
Position Locks to secure them.

Note: See Chapter 6: Trouble-


shooting for sealer adjustment tips.

After the initial adjustment, run


the tape out again and observe
whether the cover tape aligns
itself satisfactorily. If it is still
misaligned, continue adjusting
the cover tape guide until it is
aligned properly.

5. CREATE TRAILER (optional)


The term “leader” and “trailer” refer to the lengths of empty carrier tape required at the
beginning (leader) and the end (trailer) of the finished reel of placed parts. Therefore,
when the reel is being taped on the TM-402, the trailer is the first length of empty carrier
tape run before the first part is taped and the leader is the length of empty carrier tape run
after the last part is taped.

a. There are no HMI controls for creating a


Trailer. If a Trailer is desired, simply open
the HMI Taper Tab and press Continuous
Advance at the beginning of the reel and
run out sealed empty pockets until the
desired trailer length is reached.

b. Press the right Arrow key to move to the


next screen and configure leader creation.

Configure HMI Settings D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 17

Step 6: 6. ENABLE LEADER.


Setup HMI
TAPER

a. Select Leader State and enter Leader Length in millimeters if enabled.

Note: If Leader is disabled or a leader value of zero is entered, the Taper will
automatically advance the last part until it reaches the cut point. If a leader value
is entered, it will move the last placed part that distance beyond the cut point.

b. Press the right Arrow key to move to the next screen.

D292105.7b.fm Configure HMI Settings


4-18 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 6: 7. PICK HEAD SETUP The next seven Job Wizard screens are used to set the pick
Setup HMI and place positions.
PICK
HEAD

A B

a. Press the Jog buttons or the Jog buttons on top of the Sealer enclosure to
move the Pick Head to the Bowl Feeder, centering it over the Nest in the pick
position.

b. Press Learn. The Learned Position will now match the Current Position and
the Learn button will turn green and update to read Learned.

c. Press the right Arrow to move to the next Job Wizard screen. .

Configure HMI Settings D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 19

Step 6: 8. SET PICK HEIGHT.


Setup HMI
PICK a. Open the TM-402 enclosure doors to access the pick head.
HEAD
b. Use a 2.5mm hex wrench to hold the
Actuator Adjustment Screw in place from
the bottom, while loosening the Jam Nut
on top of the Actuator Adjustment Screw
with an 8mm open ended wrench. Raise
the Nozzle until it is at a safe height so it
will not collide with the current part when
extended.

c. Tighten the Jam Nut.

d. Press the Pick Extend button.

e. Loosen the Jam Nut on top of the Actuator Adjustment Screw again, then
lower the Nozzle until it is barely touching the part in the Pick Location.

Note: For all Nozzle Tips except the Convum Tips, the pick position should be set
just above the surface of the part with a very small clearance between the nozzle
and the part. Because the Convum Nozzle Tips are flexible, it is all right if the tip is
programmed to touch the part when picking.

f. Tighten the Jam Nut.

g. Press Pick Retract to retract the Nozzle to a safe height.

h. Press the right Arrow to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

D292105.7b.fm Configure HMI Settings


4-20 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 6: 9. Nozzle Setup: Manual Rotation


Setup HMI
PICK
HEAD

a. Place a part in the pick position. Press Pick Part to activate the Pick Head
and pick a part from the pick location.

b. If the part needs to be rotated before it is placed in tape, press Rotate Part.
This will rotate it +90°. If no rotation is required for part placement, skip this
step.

c. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

10. Set Place Position

a. Use the Arrow keys to position the Pick Head and Carrier Tape so the Nozzle
is centered over the carrier tape placement position. The Up/Down Arrow

Configure HMI Settings D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 21

Step 6: keys move the Pick Head forward and backward. The Left/Right Arrow keys
Setup HMI move the tape left and right in the Taper Track.
PICK
HEAD b. When the Nozzle is centered over the tape pocket, press Set Place Position
to set the position.

c. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

11. Set Place Nozzle Height The Pick Head’s Z Axis (up/down) position needs to be
set at the Place position.

a. To manually set the Place Actuator to


the correct nozzle height, press Place
Extend

b. Use a 2.5mm hex wrench to hold the


Actuator Adjustment Screw in place
from the bottom, while loosening the
Jam Nut on top of the Actuator
Adjustment Screw with an 8mm open
ended wrench. Lower the Nozzle until
the part is barely touching the top of
the pocket in the Place Location.

c. Tighten the Jam Nut.

d. Press Place Retract to retract the


Nozzle to a safe height.

e. Press the right Arrow Key to move to


the next Job Wizard screen.

D292105.7b.fm Configure HMI Settings


4-22 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 6: 12. Set Rotation Angle


Setup HMI
PICK
HEAD

a. Press the Placement Rotation Angle field to toggle through the rotation
options. The options are 0, -90 and +90. Select the correct placement angle.

• If rotation is set at 0,
the part will be placed
in the same orientation
Rotation Options
as it was picked.

• If rotation is set at -90,


the part will be rotated
90 degrees clockwise -90
prior to placement.

• If rotation is set at +90, 0


the part will be rotated
90 degrees counter-
clockwise prior to
placement.
+90

b. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next Job Wizard screen.

Configure HMI Settings D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 23

Step 6: 13. Verify Job Settings


Setup HMI
VERIFY

Test the job settings, using the Pick Part and Place Part buttons to pick and
place parts. If adjustment are required, use the left Arrow key to return to the
desired step and adjust settings. Press the right Arrow Key to move to the next
Job Wizard screen.

Note: Manually placed parts will be counted in the current job.

Step 6: 14. Vision Settings


Setup HMI
VISION

a. Set Camera State to Enabled or Disabled.

b. If camera is enabled, enter number of Parts Until Inspection (do not include
part at Pick point.). Press the right Arrow Key to move to the final Job Wizard
screen.

D292105.7b.fm Configure HMI Settings


4-24 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 6: 15. Save Job Settings


Setup HMI
SAVE
SETTINGS

a. Browse through the Job Library using the Up/Down Arrow keys to move up or
down through the list. To select a Job Name from the list, press the Enter key.

Note: The Save function will overwrite the information stored for the currently
selected job. Therefore, it is important to select the desired job prior to pressing
the Save button.

b. Press the Save button to save job settings to the selected job name, then
press Finish to close the Job Wizard and return to the main Job Tab.

Configure HMI Settings D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 4: Setup 4- 25

Step 7: Test Seal


Seal Test
Perform a Seal Test to ensure a good seal. Adjust Sealer settings in the HMI Taper tab as
necessary.
Taper Screen 1

1. Run the tape through the taping module by pressing the Continuous Advance
button in the HMI Taper Tab.

2. As the seal is occurring, watch the alignment of the cover tape with the carrier
tape. The cover tape should run exactly in the groove of the cover tape guide and
the seal should appear as a solid, consistent line. If the seal width is incorrect, stop
the Taper by pressing the Continuous Advance button again.

3. Adjust the seal positions as necessary. The sealer’s inside and outside seals are
independently adjustable. If one of the seals needs to be moved, loosen the

D292105.7b.fm Test Seal


4-26 TM-403 User’s Guide

corresponding position lock and turn the adjusters.


Inner Seal Adjust

Position Lock

Outer Seal Adjust

Position Lock

Turning the wheel counter-clockwise will move the guide towards the operator.
Turning it clockwise will move the guide closer to the machine. Adjust the Inner
Seal Adjust and the Outer Seal Adjust to the desired position, then tighten the
Position Locks to secure them.

4. Perform a Seal Test.

The V-TEK PT-55 Peel Force Tester is pictured above. (Sold separately.)

Proceed to Chapter 5: Vision Setup to configure the Vision System for operation.

Test Seal D292105.7b.fm


Chapter 5: Vision Setup

Contents
Quick Start: Vision Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Connect Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Setup HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Connect Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Connect Keyence Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Configure Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Configure Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Configure Keyence Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-2 TM-403 User’s Guide

Quick Start: Vision Setup


The following is an outline of the basic steps required to configure inspection on the TM-
402. More detailed instructions follow in the next section of this chapter.

1. Load Vision Software (user supplied computer only)

2. Connect Vision Computer/Monitor to Camera

3. Configure Inspection

If the optional laptop was purchased for vision configuration V-


TEK, Inc. recommends users create a computer Recovery
Disk prior to operation and conduct periodic back-ups as
needed. Visit the computer manufacturer’s website for instruc-
tions on creating a recovery disk.

V-TEK, Inc. does not create or maintain recovery information for


this laptop. Creating a recovery disk is solely the users’
responsibility.

Quick Start: Vision Setup D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 3

Step 1: Connect Vision


Vision
Setup Note: The TM-402 vision system can be run with a computer or a Keyence IV-G
CONNECT Monitor. These options are not included with the TM-402. They can be purchased
separately from V-TEK, Inc. or the user may provide their own computer.

System requirements for the vision computer follow:

• Operating system: Microsoft® Windows XPTM (32 bit), Windows VistaTM (32bit),
or Windows 7TM (32 or 64 bit)
• 128 MB RAM
• 1024 x 768 (96 DPI) or 1280 x 1024 (120 DPI display
• Ethernet port

If vision is enabled for a job, the vision computer/monitor must be connected to the Key-
ence IV-G Camera and the camera must be trained to inspect the part before the job can
be run.

Setup HMI
Follow the steps below to enable Vision Inspection on the TM-402.

1. On the TM-402 HMI, open the Taper Tab. Press the right Arrow button to advance
to the second Taper screen.Ensure the Camera State is set to Enabled.

2. Using the M12 ethernet cable which was provided with the TM-402 system,
connect the vision computer to the Keyence camera.

D292105.16c.fm Connect Vision


5-4 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 1: If the optional laptop was purchased for vision configuration V-


Vision TEK, Inc. recommends users create a computer Recovery
Setup Disk prior to operation and conduct periodic back-ups as
CONNECT needed. Visit the computer manufacturer’s website for instruc-
tions on creating a recovery disk.

V-TEK, Inc. does not create or maintain recovery information for


this laptop. Creating a recovery disk is solely the users’
responsibility.

3. Turn the computer on, then insert the Keyence IV-G software CD. When the
software installation screen appears, follow the prompts to install the Keyence
software.

Note: Keyence IV-G Software is automatically installed if using the optional V-TEK
laptop or Keyence IV-G Monitor. If using one of these options, skip this step and
proceed to Configure Inspection.

4. On the TM-402 HMI, select the Taper Tab, then press the Right Arrow key to
advance to the second Taper screen.

5. Ensure the Camera State is Enabled. Ensure the Parts Until Inspection field is
correct.

Note: The Parts Until Inspection value is the number of pockets between the
Place point and the Inspection point. Begin the count at the Place position at zero,
so the Place position is not included.

Connect Vision D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 5

Step 1: Connect Computer


Vision Follow the steps below to connect the Keyence IV-G Camera to the vision computer.
Setup (Proceed to the next section if using the Keyence Monitor instead of a computer.)
CONNECT
LAPTOP 1. Open the Control Panel, then select Network and Sharing Center. In the Connect
or Disconnect section, click Local Area Connection.

2. The Local Area Connection Status window will open. Click Properties.

D292105.16c.fm Connect Vision


5-6 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 1: 3. Double click Internet Protocol version4 (TCP/IPv4)


Vision
Setup
CONNECT
LAPTOP

4. Ensure Obtain an IP address automatically is selected. Click OK.

Connect Vision D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 7

Step 1: 5. To select a stored inspection or configure a new inspection, open


Vision the Keyence Inspection System software by double-clicking on
Setup the IV Navigator icon on the desktop.
CONNECT
LAPTOP

6. Select Direct Connection.

7. The following pop-up will appear. Press Connect.

D292105.16c.fm Connect Vision


5-8 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 1: A Connecting to Sensor status window will open.


Vision
Setup
CONNECT
LAPTOP

8. Once the connection is complete, the Run/Program window will open.

Connect Vision D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 9

Step 1: Connect Keyence Monitor


Vision Follow the steps below to connect the Keyence IV-G Camera to the Keyence Monitor.
Setup (See previous section if using the Keyence computer.)
CONNECT
MONITOR 1. Connect the Monitor's Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the back of the TM-
402 (A).

A B

2. Connect the Monitor's power cable to the power connection on the back of the TM-
402 (B).

3. Turn the TM-402 ON. The Keyence Monitor will automatically start and open the
Keyence software program.

4. Select Direct Connection, then press Connect to establish a connection between


the Keyence Monitor and the Keyence Camera.

D292105.16c.fm Connect Vision


5-10 TM-403 User’s Guide

Configure Inspection
Note: Significant portions of this documentation were provided by: Keyence Cor-
poration of America. In order to use the Keyence IV Vision System, the camera
must be configured and set to Run Mode in the Keyence HMI as well as being
enabled on the TM-402 HMI. Please complete the following instructions to cor-
rectly configure the vision system.

Configure Computer
1. Once the connection is complete, the Run/Program window will open. Select
Program.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 11

Step 2: 2. Click Trigger ON, then center a part under the camera.
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

3. Select or create a program from the Program drop-down menu. A yellow Selection
Box will appear over the part image.

4. Click NAVI Sensor Setup.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-12 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 5. The Image Optimization window will open.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

Select the Trigger Options button on the right.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 13

Step 2: Adjust Trigger Options to External Trigger with a 0ms Trigger Delay.
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

6. Select the Brightness Adjustment button on the right

Set the Imaging Mode to High Gain, then click the Automatic Brightness
Adjustment button. Adjust the Exposure Time as needed to achieve the best
contrast between the laser mark and the part.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-14 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2:
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

7. Select the Focus Adjustment button on the right.

Click the Automatic Focus Adjustment button. One or more yellow dots may
appear above the Undo button, representing the best focus point(s). Click on the
yellow dot(s) to jump to the associated focus point and select the best one. Adjust
Focus Position as needed using the plus/minus buttons.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 15

Step 2:
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

8. Select the Extended Functions button on the right.

Click on the Imaging Area tab (not shown) and adjust the selection box so it
captures the minimum area needed to achieve the desired inspection.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-16 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2:
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

Click on the Lighting tab and select ON and Flash. Then click the Next to STEP2
button which is located in the bottom right corner of the window.

9. The Save Master window will open.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 17

Step 2: Select Register Live image as master.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

Select Register the image.

Once the image has been registered, click OK. Then click Next to STEP3.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-18 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 10. The Tool Settings window will open.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

Select Add Tool.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 19

Step 2: Select the Outline tool, then click OK.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

A green outline will now appear around the selected mark. Click OK.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-20 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: The Tool Settings Options will now appear as below.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 21

Step 2: Adjust the yellow Selection Box so it surrounds the selected mark.
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

In the Fine Tune Outline section, click the Remove Outline button.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-22 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: The Eraser Settings window will open.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

The Eraser appears as a white square on the image. Adjust eraser size as needed,
then click and drag it over any unwanted data that is outlined in green on the
image.

Reduce Eraser size to remove any smaller green spots of unnecessary data. Click
OK to finalize edit.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 23

Step 2:
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

Click Live Adjustment and the sensor will continuously take measurements.

Adjust the threshold to yield the highest difference between good and bad parts,
then click OK.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-24 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 11. The Output Assignment window will open. Set up the Outputs as shown below.
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

• Set OUT1 to Total Status.

• Set OUT2 to Tot.StatusNG.

•Set all remaining output to OFF.

•Set Trigger Error Output to Disable.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 25

Step 2: 12. Click Complete to return to the Run/Program window. Select Run.
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

13. Click the Manual Trigger button which is located under the Program button to test
the inspection criteria.

The test results will appear on the right side of the window.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-26 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: A Statistics Graph of all test results will appear in the lower right corner.
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

14. On the TM-402 HMI, open the Taper Tab. Press the right Arrow button to advance
to the second Taper screen.

Press Trigger to manually trigger an inspection of the part under the camera. The
green PASS message should appear. Test several good parts to ensure TM-402
correctly and consistently passes good parts.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 27

Step 2: 15. Next trigger inspections with parts which are incorrectly oriented, badly marked or
Vision with an empty pocket to ensure that they generate a red FAIL message.
Setup
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER

The TM-402 is now ready for operation. Select the Run Tab to run the job.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-28 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: Configure Keyence Monitor


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE Monitor Display: Menu OFF
MONITOR

1. Title: Displays the device name, the program number and the program name.
2. Tool name: Displays the tool number and the tool name of the tool selected. The
selected tool can be switched.
3. Brightness correction range: When Brightness correction is set, the range will
be displayed with a blue frame.
4. Tool window: Displays the tool window which has been set.
5. Search Window: If the search window of the tool is set, the range will be
displayed with a light blue frame.
6. MENU/OFF button: Changes the screen from Menu ON to Menu OFF.
7. Status gauge: Displays the result (OK/NG) of the tool selected.

9. OK/NG display: Displays the total status result.


10. Processing time: Displays the time from receiving a trigger until the result is
output.
11. Image Type display: Displays the situation of the screen. Run mode or Test
mode.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 29

Step 2: Monitor Display: Menu ON


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

1. Title: Displays the device name, the program number and the program name.
2. Tool name: Displays the tool number and the tool name of the tool selected. The
selected tool can be switched.
3. Brightness correction range: When Brightness correction is set, the range will
be displayed with a blue frame.
4. Tool window: Displays the tool window which has been set.
5. Search Window: If the search window of the tool is set, the range is displayed
with a light blue frame.
7. MENU/OFF button: Changes the screen from Menu ON to Menu OFF.
8. Status gauge: Displays the result (OK/NG) of the tool selected.
9. OK/NG display: Displays the total status result.
10. Processing time: Displays the time from receiving a trigger until the result is
output.
11. Image Type display: Displays the situation of the screen. Run mode or Test
mode.
12. Trig button: Displayed when the external trigger is set. When this button is
touched, a trigger signal is sent to the sensor.
13. Zoom button: Changes the display to full screen mode and allows image
enlargement.
14. View button: Displays the menu to select how to show the tools and the analyze
screen.
15. Monitor settings button: Displays the monitor screen.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-30 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 16. Sensor Image Memory button: Displays the Sensor Image Memory screen.
Vision
17. USB memory button: Displays the USB memory screen.
Setup
CONFIGURE 18. Sensor setup button: Stops running mode and displays the Sensor setup menu
MONITOR screen.

Program Job
Start Navigator

1. Touch the Sensor setup button.

2. Touch the Start button.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 31

Step 2: Setup Image Optimization


Vision
Setup 1. Touch Trigger Options.
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

2. Select the External Trigger type. Touch OK.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-32 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 3. Touch Auto Brightness Adjustment. Touch OK.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

4. Touch Focus Adjustment. If Auto focusing is selected, the focus position is


adjusted automatically. If Manual focusing is selected, the focus indicator will be
displayed. Adjust focus as desired. Touch OK.

5. Touch Next to proceed to “STEP2”.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 33

Step 2: Register Master Image


Vision
Setup 1. After setting the image optimization, press Register Live Image as Master.
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

2. Image the target and touch the Trig button.

3. Check the image displayed on the monitor and touch the Register button. Touch
OK.

4. Touch Next to proceed to “STEP3”.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-34 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: Setup Outline Detection Tool


Vision
Setup 1. Touch the Add Tool button.
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

2. Select Outline.

3. Touch Edit Window.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 35

Step 2: 4. Set the position, size, and the angle of the tool window. The detected outline will be
Vision displayed in green. After the setting is completed, touch OK.
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

5. Touch the Limit Adjustment button.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-36 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 6. Set the threshold to judge OK and NG.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

7. The display will return to the main screen for the Outline tool.

8. Touch OK, then touch Next to proceed to “STEP4”.

Setup Area Detection Tool

1. Touch the Add Tool button.

2. Select Area.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 37

Step 2: 3. Touch Edit Window button.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

4. Set the position, size, and the angle of the tool window. After the setting is
completed, touch OK

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-38 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 5. Touch the Brightness Extraction button.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

6. Touch the brightness area to be the reference of judgment for the Area tool, then
touch OK.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 39

Step 2: 7. Touch the Limit Adjustment button.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

8. Set the threshold to judge OK and NG, then touch OK. The display will return to
the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool.

9. Touch OK, then touch Next to proceed to “STEP4”.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-40 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: Setup Position Adjust Detection Tool


Vision
Setup 1. Touch the Add Tool button.
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

2. Touch the Pos.Adj. button.

3. Touch the Edit Window button.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 41

Step 2: 4. Set the position, size, and the angle of the tool window. The detected outline will be
Vision displayed in green. Touch OK.
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

5. Touch the Limit Adjustment button.

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-42 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 6. Set the threshold to judge OK and NG.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

7. After the setting is completed, touch OK. The display will return to the main screen
for Position Adjustment tool.

8. Touch OK again, then touch Next to proceed to “STEP4”.

Confirm I/O Settings


1. In the Sensor Setup Menu, touch Sensor Advanced.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 43

Step 2: 2. In the Sensor Advanced screen, touch I/O Settings.


Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

3. In the I/O Settings screen, ensure Polarity is set to PNP. (A)

Next, touch the Output Settings button. (B)

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-44 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 2: 4. In the Output Settings screen, touch the Common Output Settings button.
Vision
Setup
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

5. In the Common Output Settings screen, adjust settings as follows:

• One-Shot ON Time = 100 ms

• ON-Delay Time = 0 ms

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 5: Setup 5- 45

Step 2: Setup Output


Vision
Setup 1. Touch the output line to assign the output function.
CONFIGURE
MONITOR

Set the output functions as follows:

• OUT1 = Busy

• OUT2 = Total Status

• OUT3 - OUT8 = OFF

D292105.16c.fm Configure Inspection


5-46 TM-403 User’s Guide

2. After the setting is completed, touch Complete, then touch Yes.

Configure Inspection D292105.16c.fm


Chapter 6: Operation

Contents
Quick Start: Running a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Power up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Home Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Setup the Bowl Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Setup the Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Select Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Setup the Pick Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Setup Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Run the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-2 TM-403 User’s Guide

Quick Quick Start: Running a Job


Start
The following is an outline of the basic steps required to run a pre-programmed job. More
detailed instructions follow in the next section of this chapter.

Caution: Users should always wear protective eye wear when operat-
ing or maintaining the TM-402.

1. Power up.
• Power up the machine by turning on the Main Power Switch.
• Press the Reset button.

2. Home the motors.


• Open the Run Tab on the HMI and select Home Motors.

3. Setup Bowl Feeder.


• Ensure correct Linear Track is installed.
• Load components.

4. Setup Taper.
• Ensure sufficient carrier tape and cover tape are loaded to complete the job.
• Load an empty take-up reel.
• Run peel force test to verify seal.

5. Setup the Pick Head.


• Ensure the correct nozzle is installed for the part that will be picked.
• Observe the vacuum sensor, adjusting nozzle pressure as necessary.
• Adjust Blow-off Pressure as needed to achieve proper part placement.
• Close the enclosure doors.

6. Select Job.
• Open the Job Tab on the HMI. Select the desired job from the Job Library and
press Open to open the selected job in the Run Tab.

Quick Start: Running a Job D292105.8b.fm


Chapter 6: Operation 6- 3

Quick 7. Setup Vision.


Start • Open the Taper Tab on the HMI and advance to the second screen.
• Ensure camera is ON. Configure inspection as needed.

Note: To configure vision inspection, see Chapter 4: Setup.

8. Run the Job.


• On the HMI, select the Run Tab then press Run.
• Load/unload parts and reels as needed.

Caution!
V-TEK® Incorporated takes no responsibility for the safety of TM-402 if it is
used for any purpose other than the intended purpose as specified in this
User’s Guide.

D292105.8b.fm Quick Start: Running a Job


6-4 TM-403 User’s Guide

Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job


The initial set-up and configuration of a new job are covered in Chapter 4: Setup. This
chapter discusses the procedure for setting up existing jobs, running a job and routine
operator tasks.

Caution: Users should always wear protective eye wear when operating
or maintaining the TM-402.

Step 1:
Power
Power up the System
Up 1. Power up the machine by turning the Main Power Switch, which is
located on the right side of the machine, to the ON position.

2. Press the blue Reset button on the left side of the machine.

Step 2:
Home
Home Motors
Motors Note: The TM-402 only needs to be homed once after each power up or emer-
gency stop. Once the motors have been homed, they remain homed until the
machine is powered down.

1. The HMI will open to the Job Tab with a red Home Required button at the top of
the Tab Menu and the other tab buttons grayed out. Press Home Required to
open the Homing Status window.

Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job D292105.8b.fm


Chapter 6: Operation 6- 5

Step 2: 2. Press the Home All Motors button.


Home
Motors

The motor homing sequence begins with the nozzle moving slowly upwards (Z
Axis movement). After about a three second delay, the pick head will begin to
move slowly to the right towards the taper (X Axis movement).

The pick head homing sequence will continue until the nozzle has risen to its
highest position and then returned to home and the head has moved all the way to
the right and then returned to home.

Homing progress is displayed as a green bar in the Pick Axis Motor field of the
Homing window. Once the nozzle and head have stopped moving, homing is
complete. A Homing Succeeded! message will appear on the bottom of the
screen.

D292105.8b.fm Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job


6-6 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 3: Setup the Bowl Feeder


Setup 1. On the HMI, select Bowl from the tab menu on the left to open the Bowl Setup
Bowl Feeder Tab.

2. Ensure the correct track size is installed for the part which will be run.

3. Load parts into the Bowl Feeder.

4. In the HMI Bowl Settings Tab, turn the Linear Vibratory to Enabled. The Linear
Track will turn on and activate the Bowl and Hopper, feeding parts into the Bowl.

5. Manually adjust the Vibratory Controls on the Bowl Assembly for Linear Track
and Bowl as needed to suit the type of component that is being processed.

Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job D292105.8b.fm


Chapter 6: Operation 6- 7

Step 4: Setup the Taper


Setup 1. Load the correct carrier tape and cover
Taper tape, adjusting the track width as
necessary.

2. Select PSA or Heat seal.

3. Align cover tape with carrier tape.

4. Run a pull test and adjust seal strength


as needed.

5. Place an empty reel onto the take-up


reel spindle.

6. Use the Continuous Advance button on the Taper Tab to run out the tape until it
can be attached to the reel.

The tape normally can be attached by inserting it into the reel hub or with blue
Permacel tape.

D292105.8b.fm Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job


6-8 TM-403 User’s Guide

Step 5: Select Job


Select When a job is already set up and saved in the machine’s memory, the first step in running
Job the job is to call it up with the Job Select screen.

1. On the HMI, select the Job Tab

2. Browse through the Job Library to locate the desired job by using the up and down
Arrow buttons.

3. Press the Enter button to select the job, then press Open to open the selected job
in the Run Tab..

Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job D292105.8b.fm


Chapter 6: Operation 6- 9

Step 6: Setup the Pick Head


Setup 1. Ensure the correct Nozzle and Nozzle Tip are installed for the job that will be run.:
Pick Head

Note: See the Chapter 4: Setup for nozzle


change procedures.

2. Open the Head Tab on the HMI.

D292105.8b.fm Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job


6-10 TM-403 User’s Guide

3. Press Move To Pick, then press Pick Part. Observe the


vacuum sensor which is located on top of the head to
see if it is set correctly for the current part. The numbers
should be lit in green with components on the nozzle
and red if components are not.

Note: See the Chapter 6: Troubleshooting for vacuum


sensor adjustment procedures.

4. Return to the Head Setup Tab.Press Move To Place, then press Place Part.

Check that the Blow Off Pressure is set correctly for the
current part. The Blow-off Pressure Gauge is located on
the front of the Pick Head Bridge. If components are not
dropping properly, pull the gauge out and rotate to adjust
pressure levels. When the desired pressure level is
reached, push the gauge back in.

Step 7:
Setup
Setup Vision
Vision The TM-402 Vision System will automatically revert to the previous inspection. If the
same part is being run, there is no need to retrain the camera. Proceed to Step 8. If a dif-
ferent job/inspection is being run, follow the setup instructions in Chapter 4: Setup.

Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job D292105.8b.fm


Chapter 6: Operation 6- 11

Step 8: Run the Job


Run 1. Close the enclosure doors, then open the HMI Run Tab and press Run.
Job

During operation, the operator will add additional parts to the Bowl Feeder and
unload packaged parts from the Taper as necessary. The operator may also
replace parts that fail 2D Inspection. Otherwise no other adjustments are required
for a job that has already been defined properly.

2. When the preset number of parts has been run, the TM-402 will automatically stop
operation.

Note: If Leader has been ENABLED, the Taper will continue to seal tape until it
reaches the programmed Leader length. If Leader is DISABLED, the Taper will
continue to seal tape until the last sealed part has reached the cut point.

3. Cut the sealed tape at the cut point and use a piece of blue Permacel tape to
secure the finished reel. Remove processed output.

D292105.8b.fm Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job


6-12 TM-403 User’s Guide

Preparing to Run a Pre-programmed Job D292105.8b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting

Contents

Emergency Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2


Activating an Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Clearing an Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
System Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Error Message Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Adjusting Nozzle Vacuum Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Tips on Part Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Sensor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Adjusting the Low Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Adjusting the Tape Jam Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Adjusting Heat Seal Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Heat Seal Shoe Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Seal Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Sealer Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Adjusting PSA Seal Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Materials Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Seal Roller Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7-2 TM-403 User’s Guide

Emergency Stop
The Emergency Stop Button is located on the left
side of the TM-402.

If the Emergency Stop is pushed, the TM-402 will


automatically enter an Emergency Stop state.
When an Emergency Stop is triggered, the Tower
Light switches to red and all operations cease.

Activating an Emergency Stop


If emergency stop condition occurs, follow the steps below to resolve the
failure.

1. Press the red E-Stop button to place the TM-402 into an Emergency
Stop state. The Tower Light will switch to red and all operations will
cease. On the HMI, a Halted State message will appear.

2. Resolve the problem.(See tips on resolving error conditions which follow.)

Emergency Stop D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-3

Clearing an Emergency Stop


To clear an Emergency Stop, follow the directions below.

1. Twist the activated Emergency Stop button to turn it off and


release the button.

2. Close all the doors on the TM-402.

3. Press the blue Reset button.

4. The Boot Screen will appear on the HMI Monitor and display a loading
progress message. This process typically takes about 90 seconds to
complete.

5. Once the system has finished booting, the HMI will open to the Job Tab with the Home
Required button displayed. Press Home Required to begin the homing sequence.

D292105.9b.fm Emergency Stop


7-4 TM-403 User’s Guide

6. The Homing Status window will open. Press Home All Motors

7. When the homing sequence is completed, the bar will turn from black to green and a Hom-
ing Succeeded! message will appear.

Emergency Stop D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-5

8. Once homing is complete, press the Left Arrow button will open the Run Tab.

9. Press the Run button on the HMI Run Tab to resume operation.

D292105.9b.fm Emergency Stop


7-6 TM-403 User’s Guide

System Alarm Messages


During TM-402 operation, the operator will occasionally be prompted to fill the Tray
Feeder with parts, unload the Taper or check an Inspection Fail.

When the TM-402 requires attention it will automatically stop. A beep will sound
and the Tower Light will turn flashing red to draw the operator’s attention.

On the HMI, a System Alarm Message will appear.

System Alarms are triggered for several reasons. When the TM-402’s sensors detect an error sit-
uation such as Low Cover Tape or a Tape Jam, the System Alarm Message alerts the user to the
error. System Alarms will also appear if the TM-402 needs to be adjusted before operation can
begin. For example, if the E-Stop button is depressed preventing operation, the System Alarm
alerts the user so the situation can be resolved and operation can begin.

System Alarm Messages contain a description of the problem and suggestions for resolving the
problem. They also include an illustration of the TM-402 with the area of interest indicated by a
flashing red outline.

To resolve a System Alarm, follow the suggested steps to clear the error situation then click Con-
tinue to return to the HMI screen that was active before the alarm was activated. To resume
operation, press Start on the HMI Run Tab.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-7

Note: There are a variety of error conditions which could cause the machine to stop. See
the Error Message Table at the end of this section for an explanation of the various error
messages and their suggested solutions.

An illustration and description of each System Alarm Message follows.

Part Not Picked System Alarm


If the nozzle is unable to pick a part from the Bowl Feeder, the Part Not Picked system alarm will
be activated. When this happens, operation stops, a beep sounds, and a warning appears on the
HMI.

To clear the Unable to Pick Alarm, ensure there are parts in the bowl and it is feeding properly
with no jams in the feeding track. If that does not resolve the problem, ensure the Pick Height is
not set too high. Finally, verify the Vibratory is Enabled.

When the Bowl Feeder is ready for operation, press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and resume
operation.

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-8 TM-403 User’s Guide

Empty Nest System Alarm


If the Part Present Sensor does not see a part in the Nest, the system will time out and the Empty
Nest system alarm will be activated. When this happens, operation stops, a beep sounds, and a
warning appears on the HMI.

To clear the Empty Nest Alarm, ensure there are parts in the linear track and it is feeding properly
with no jams. If that does not resolve the problem, adjust the linear vibratory amplitude as
needed.

When the Bowl Feeder is ready for operation, press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and resume
operation.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-9

Part Lost System Alarm


If a part falls off the nozzle and is lost during the pick process, the Part Lost system alarm will be
activated. When this happens, operation stops, a beep sounds, and a warning appears on the
HMI.

To clear the Part Lost System Alarm, check the Vacuum Sensor to ensure it is set correctly.
Ensure the correct Nozzle Tip for the part that is being picked is installed. Check the nest to
ensure there is no part jam. Finally, check the Pick Position to ensure it is centered correctly.
Adjust as necessary.

When the Bowl Feeder is ready for operation, press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and resume
operation.

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-10 TM-403 User’s Guide

No Part to Place System Alarm


If the user attempts to place a part in tape when there is no part on the Nozzle, the No Part To
Place System Alarm will be activated. When this happens, operation stops, a beep sounds, and
a warning appears on the HMI

To clear the No Part To Place System Alarm, pick a part then press CONTINUE to clear the
alarm and resume part placement.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-11

Tape Jam Sensor System Alarm


The Tape Jam Sensor is located on the Taper Track just
before the Sealer. It detects when parts are protruding
above the top of the pocket due to a misplaced part or
tape jam.

When the Tape Jam sensor is enabled and a jam occurs, operation stops, a beep sounds and a
warning appears on the HMI.

Clear the tape jam and then press CONTINUE to clear the error message and continue opera-
tion.

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-12 TM-403 User’s Guide

Vision Error System Alarm


The 2D Inspection System is mounted on the Taper between the
place point and the Sealer. It inspects parts for mark and orienta-
tion. It also detects empty pockets

If the 2D Inspection System detects an inspection error, the 2D


Inspection System Alarm will be activated. Tape advance stops,
a beep sounds and a warning appears on the HMI.

To clear the Vision Error system alarm, re-orient or replace the failed part under the 2D Inspec-
tion Camera. Press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and resume operation.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-13

Inspection Time-out System Alarm


If the 2D Inspection System fails to inspect a part within a preset time period, the Inspection
Time-out System Alarm will be activated. Tape advance stops, a beep sounds and a warning
appears on the HMI.

To clear the Inspection Time-out System Alarm, ensure the 2D Inspection Camera is connected
to power and setup correctly. Press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and resume operation.

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-14 TM-403 User’s Guide

Temperature Out of Range System Alarm


When Heat Seal is enabled and the Heat Shoe temperatures are either too hot or too cold, a
Heat Seal Temperature Out of Range system alarm will activate.

When this occurs, tape advance stops, a beep sounds and a warning appears on the HMI.

To clear the Heat Seal Temperature Out of Range System Alarm, wait for the heat shoes to
reach their set point and then press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and resume operation.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-15

Heat Sealer Inactivity System Alarm


If the Taper is inactive for 40 minutes or longer, the Heat Sealer is automatically disabled. Once
that occurs, if a user attempts to run a job, or use Continuous Advance, Pocket Advance or Man-
ual Seal a Heat Sealer Inactivity system alarm will activate.

When this occurs, tape advance stops, a beep sounds and a warning appears on the HMI.

To clear the Heat Seal Inactivity System Alarm, wait for the heat shoes to reach their set point
and then press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and resume operation. The current temperature is
displayed on the system alarm message.

Note: If the user presses Continue and then attempts to move tape through the sealer
before the temperature has reached the set point, the Temperature Out Of Range system
alarm will appear, prompting the user to wait until the sealer temperature is correct.

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-16 TM-403 User’s Guide

Low Cover Tape System Alarm


The Low Cover Tape sensor is located on the Cover Tape Arm. It
detects when the cover tape supply on the Cover Tape Reel is
below a preset minimum.

If an operator attempts to start a job when the cover tape level is


below the sensor, operation will not begin. Instead a beep will
sound and a Low Cover Warning message will appear on the
HMI.

The operator can either resolve the warning by loading a full reel of cover tape or ignore the
warning and push START again to continue with the current level of cover tape.

Note: The Low Cover Tape warning will only appear once during a job. If the user ignores
the message and continues operation, the TM-402 will continue taping until the job is fin-
ished or the cover tape is empty.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-17

Job Quantity Inadequate System Alarm


If during the course of a job, the operator changes the job quantity to less than the amount of
parts that have already been processed a Job Quantity Inadequate message will appear on the
HMI.

The operator can resolve the warning by either resetting the job or increasing the job quantity.
Push Continue to clear the alarm message and resume processing.

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-18 TM-403 User’s Guide

End of Job System Alarm


If the operator completes a job and then attempts to run the same job again without resetting the
job, an End of Job System Alarm will appear on the HMI.

The operator can resolve the alarm by resetting the job. Push Continue to clear the alarm mes-
sage and resume processing.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-19

Halted State Error Condition


If the E-Stop button is pressed or the system is started up and the Reset button is not pressed,
the following message will appear on the HMI.

To resolve the error message, clear the emergency stop condition, then
twist and release the E-Stop button.

Press the Reset button. Once the system has finished booting, open the
HMI Job Tab and press Home Required to begin the motor homing sequence.

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-20 TM-403 User’s Guide

HMI Error Condition


If the operator enters a value in a setup field that is outside the accepted range for the field or if
the Ethernet connection to the PLC is lost, the following message will appear on the HMI.

To resolve the error condition in this instance, enter an acceptable value into the field.

If this message persists, it indicates that the Ethernet connection to the PLC may have been lost.
Contact V-TEK Service for support.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-21

Error Message Table

Error Condition Solution


“The system was unable to suc- Nozzle is not picking parts from the Bowl Feeder. Check
cessfully pick from the current the following:
location.” - Feeder is empty.
- Linear Track is jammed.
- Pick height is too high.
“The heat seal temperature is The Heat Sealer on the Taper has not reached the cor-
not within range.” rect temperature. Wait until sealer has had enough time
to reach the correct temperature.
“The heat sealer was disabled The Heat Sealer on the Taper was automatically dis-
due to inactivity.” abled after being inactive for more than 40 minutes. Wait
until sealer has had enough time to reach the correct
temperature, then proceed.
“The tape jam sensor has been Check carrier tape prior to Sealer to ensure part is not
activated.” sticking out of pocket. Remove any obstructions, then
resume operation.
“The cover tape is running low.” Refill cover tape.
“A part has failed visual inspec- Check the following:
tion in the carrier tape.” - Part is incorrectly oriented.
- Part mark is missing or obscured.
- Part is missing.
“The inspection system has Check the following:
timed out.” - Vision system is not connected to power
- Vision System is setup incorrectly.
“The last part picked was lost Check the following:
between the pick and place - Vacuum Sensor is set correctly.
point.” - The correct Nozzle Tip is installed.
- Pick Position is centered correctly.
“There’s not a part available to Pick a part and proceed.
place.”
“The job has been completed. Reset the job.
Reset the job to continue pro-
cessing.”
“The system has already placed The job quantity was changed after parts have been run.
more parts than the entered Reset job or increase quantity.
quantity.”

D292105.9b.fm System Alarm Messages


7-22 TM-403 User’s Guide

Error Condition Solution


“The system is currently in a Check the following:
halted state.” - The Emergency Stop has been pressed. Resolve the
situation, then twist and release the. E-Stop button.
- The Reset Button has not been pressed. Press Reset.
- Once the condition is corrected, wait for system initial-
ization and home all motors.
“The HMI is in an error condi- - If an unacceptable value has been entered into a setup
tion...” field, change the value to one that fits that field’s parame-
ters.
- If this message persists, the Ethernet connection to the
PLC may have been lost. Contact V-TEK Service for sup-
port.

System Alarm Messages D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-23

Adjusting Nozzle Vacuum Sensors


The TM-402’s Nozzle Vacuum Sensor is setup before the machine is shipped. It may occasion-
ally require adjustment depending on vacuum sensitivity and the type of part that is being pro-
cessed.

If the TM-402 places “empty” pockets (i.e. places as though it held a part when it did not) or
returns a picking part error when it picked a part, the vacuum sensor’s threshold point probably
needs to be adjusted.

Vacuum Sensor Settings


1. Close the enclosure doors, then open the Head Setup Tab.

2. Press the Pick Part button to activate vacuum and pick a


part. Observe the vacuum sensor indicator which is located
on the Pick & Place Head above the nozzles. The numbers
should be lit in green with components on the nozzle and
red if components are not.

3. If the sensors require adjustment, Press the blue Set button


once. The sensor will alternately flash P_1 and the current
value.

4. Use the Up/Down Arrow Keys to adjust the sensor as


needed with components both on and off of the nozzles..

5. Press the blue Set button again to exit back to normal opera-
tion.

D292105.9b.fm Adjusting Nozzle Vacuum Sensors


7-24 TM-403 User’s Guide

Tips on Part Placement


If components are not dropped properly, there are four variables that can be adjusted to correct
the problem.

Note: Each part is different and may require a different combination of adjustments to
obtain proper place performance.

1. Adjust Blow-off Pressure. The Blow-off Pressure Gauge is


located on the front of the Pick Head enclosure. If components
are not dropping properly, pull the gauge out and rotate to adjust
pressure levels. When the desired pressure level is reached,
push the gauge back in.

Note: Every part is different and may require a different combi-


nation of adjustments to obtain proper place performance.

2. Adjust Place Position X. Open the HMI Head Tab. Press the Move To Place button.

Tips on Part Placement D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-25

3. Press the Right Arrow to move to the next Head Tab.

Jog the head up or down until the nozzle is centered correctly over the place location.
When the nozzle is positioned correctly, press the Set Place Position button.

4. Adjust Place Position Z. Manually adjust the right Actuator Adjustment Screw up or
down until the nozzle is extended the appropriate distance above the place location. You
may need to experiment with placing a part to determine what Z Axis height works best.
When the nozzle is positioned correctly, press the Set Place Position button.

Actuator
Adjustment
Screw

D292105.9b.fm Tips on Part Placement


7-26 TM-403 User’s Guide

5. Adjust Blow Off Time. Press the right Arrow button on the bottom of the second Head
Tab to move to the last Head Tab screen

6. Adjust the length of Blow Off as needed to drop the part properly.

Note: If Nozzle Blow Off is set too low, the part may remain on the Nozzle Tip or “float”
down, resulting in an incorrectly placed part in the pocket.

If Nozzle Blow Off is set too high, the excess air may cause the part to bounce back out of
the pocket. Adjust the Nozzle Blow Off value until the TM-402 consistently and accurately
places parts in the carrier tape.

Tips on Part Placement D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-27

Sensor Adjustments
Adjusting the Low Cover Sensor
The Low Cover Sensor alerts the operator at the begin-
ning of a job if there is not enough cover tape loaded on
the Cover Tape Reel to complete the job.

Loosen the screws on the Cover Tape Low Sensor to


adjust it’s position. It should rest so the sensor light is
positioned at the minimum level of cover tape required
to complete a job.

If sensor sensitivity needs to be fine tuned, adjust the


amplifiers at the base of the Cover Tape Arm. For more
information on the sensor/amplifier, refer to Appendix
A: Sensors

No further setup is required. The Low Cover Sensor is


ready to operate.

Amplifiers

Adjusting the Tape Jam Sensor


The Tape Jam Sensor is located on the Taper track
just before the Sealer. It detects if parts are doubled up
or incorrectly placed in a carrier tape pocket so that
the part protrudes above the level of the track and
would interfere with cover tape placement.

If sensor sensitivity needs to be fine tuned, adjust the


amplifiers at the base of the Cover Tape Arm. For
more information on the sensor/amplifier, refer to
Appendix A: Sensors.

No further setup is required. The Jam In Tape Sensor


is ready to operate.

D292105.9b.fm Sensor Adjustments


7-28 TM-403 User’s Guide

Adjusting Heat Seal Quality


If a Peel Force Test determines the Heat Sealer is not generating a satisfactory seal, try one of
the adjustments below to improve seal strength.

Heat Seal Shoe Temperature


Open the HMI Taper Tab. Press the right Arrow button twice to advance to the third Taper
screen.

Increase or decrease the temperature of the sealer shoes. The inside and outside seals have
independent temperature controllers. Increase or decrease the Set Point for each sealer as
needed. Under normal conditions and materials, changing the temperatures should suffice.

Note: Generally it is best practice to adjust the temperature to achieve the desired peel
force.

The TM-402 accommodates a wide range of carrier tapes and cover tapes. Settings may
vary from one tape product to another. The suggested starting point is 90 degrees Cel-
sius. The maximum recommended operating temperature is 160° C. The temperature for
each seal shoe should be increased or decreased as needed after running a peel force
test.

Adjusting Heat Seal Quality D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 7: Troubleshooting 7-29

Seal Pressure
This control is located on the front of the Taper. It controls the
amount of force applied when the sealer shoes drop. Turning
the Seal Pressure control clockwise will increase the pressure,
while turning it counter-clockwise will decrease the pressure.

Adjust the heat shoe Seal Pressure to the appropriate setting.


The recommended starting point is between 40-60 psi.

Sealer Dwell Time


Open the HMI Taper Tab. Press the right Arrow button twice to advance to the third Taper
screen.

The Dwell Time is the amount of time the sealer spends in contact with the cover tape. Increase
or decrease the dwell time.

Note: The dwell time affects the throughput of the taper. The recommended Dwell Time
is 400 ms.

D292105.9b.fm Adjusting Heat Seal Quality


7-30 TM-403 User’s Guide

Adjusting PSA Seal Quality


If a Peel Force Test determines the PSA Sealer is not generating a satisfactory seal, try one of
the adjustments below to improve seal strength.

Check Sealer Settings


Open the HMI Taper Tab. Review the settings on the four Taper Tab screens to ensure Tape
Settings and Sealer Settings are appropriate for the current job.

Materials Used
For a PSA seal, seal strength is determined first by the nature of the materials used. It is nor-
mally recommended to use the same brand of cover and carrier tapes together as the manufac-
turers use the appropriate adhesive to match the material used to make the carrier tapes.

Seal Roller Pressure


The second factor in PSA seal strength is the pressure applied to the cover tape as it is sealed to
the carrier tape. The seal should appear as a solid stripe and it should not show any inconsisten-
cies. If it does, the alignment of the cover tape should be confirmed and then the pressure to the
seal rollers adjusted.

On the top of each sealer block, there are three


holes with a screw in the center hole. With carrier
and cover tape loaded, spin the Sealer Wheel.
While spinning the Sealer Wheel, turn the screw PSA Seal
clockwise until the wheel no longer spins freely, Pressure
then turn the screw another 1/8 turn. The wheel
Adjustment
should be firmly in contact with the tape.
Screws
Adjust the seal roller pressure until the PSA
adhesive is firmly adhered to the carrier tape.
Experience will allow the operator to judge the correct adjustment by feel. Repeat for the other
sealer wheel.

Note: Excessive roller pressure may cause carrier tape advance problems or elongation
of sprocket holes in the carrier tape.

Adjusting PSA Seal Quality D292105.9b.fm


Chapter 8: Maintenance

Contents
Safe Maintenance Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Routine Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
General Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Air Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Pick Head Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Vacuum Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Replace the Vacuum Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Check Actuator Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Taping Module Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Heat Sealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Loading Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
PSA Sealer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Cover Tape Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-2 TM-401 User’s Guide

Safe Maintenance Steps


Caution! It is dangerous to service or maintain the TM-402 while it is con-
nected to air and power supplies.

Before performing any maintenance tasks, ensure the machine is stationary and
disconnect the electrical and pneumatic power supplies placing the unplugged
cables in clear view. Follow your company’s Lock-out/Tag-out Procedures.

Follow the steps below when performing routine maintenance or cleaning the TM-402.

1. Turn the TM-402 OFF.

2. Ensure the Main Power Switch is rotated to the OFF position. The
Main Power Switch is Lock-out/Tag-out capable. Follow your com-
pany’s Lock-out/Tag-out procedure to ensure safe maintenance.

3. Ensure the Air Regulator is rotated to the OFF position. lockout/tagout hole
The Air Regulator is Lock-out/Tag-out capable. Follow
your company’s Lock-out/Tag-out procedure to ensure
safe maintenance.

4. Disconnect the air supply and place the unplugged air


hose so it is clearly visible.

5. Disconnect the power supply and place the unplugged


power cord so it is clearly visible.

6. Remove all carrier and cover tape from the Taper.

7. Remove parts from the Bowl Feeder.

8. Perform cleaning/maintenance as needed.

9. Reload Bowl Feeder parts.

10. Reload Taper carrier tape and cover tape.

11. Reconnect the air supply.

12. Reconnect the power supply.

13. Turn the TM-402 back ON.

Safe Maintenance Steps D292105.10a.fm


Chapter 8: Maintenance 8- 3

Maintenance
Only maintenance personnel that have thoroughly read and understand the TM-402 User’s
Guide and have several years experience operating and maintaining similar machines should be
permitted to maintain the TM-402.

Routine Maintenance Schedule


The TM-402’s simple, low-maintenance design keeps required maintenance to a minimum. The
following schedule indicates common maintenance tasks and how frequently they should be per-
formed.

Maintenance Task Schedule Materials needed


Vacuum or brush dust and Daily • soft bristled paint brush or
debris off machine, including vacuum
sensors

Inspect nozzle tip for wear or Daily • To replace worn nozzle tip,
damage call V-TEK Service for spe-
cific nozzle part number.

Check and set incoming air Every 120 hours of operation • None
pressure to 85 psi with the or as needed.
vacuum on

Check & record vacuum lev- Every 40-80 hours of opera- • None
els tion

Clean Heat Sealer shoes Every 120 hours of operation • 3/32” hex wrench
or as needed • plastic or brass brush
• alcohol

Clean Loading Track Every 40 hours of operation • small, stiff bristled paint
brush

Clean Cover Tape Guide Every 40 hours of operation • alcohol


• cotton swabs

Inspect Air Pressure Regula- Every 40 hours of operation • none


tor for moisture build-up

Clean PSA Sealer assembly Every 40 hours of operation • alcohol


• cotton swabs

Replace nozzle vacuum filter Every 200-300 hours of oper- • nozzle vacuum filter (p/n
ation 201026)

Remove heat shoes, replace Every 4 months • Heat Shoes (p/n 261122)
if necessary

Caution!
Users should always wear protective eye wear when operating or maintaining the
TM-402.

D292105.10a.fm Maintenance
8-4 TM-401 User’s Guide

General Maintenance Tasks


Daily cleaning
Vacuum or brush off the machine with a stiff bristled paint brush daily, removing dust and debris
from all operating areas including the sensors.

Air Pressure Regulator


Check the incoming air pressure every 40-80
hours of operation to ensure it is set to 85 psi
with all vacuums ON. Adjust if necessary.

Inspect the air regulator for moisture accumula-


tion after every 40 hours of operation. Turn the
petcock on the bottom of the regulator clockwise
to release the fluid if moisture is present. Tighten
the petcock when moisture is gone.

Note: Frequency of moisture build-up will


vary with air quality. Check the Air Pres- Check for moisture here Petcock
sure Regulator periodically to determine
if fluids need to be released more fre-
quently.

Other than the release of moisture build-up, the TM-402 pneumatic system should not
require adjustment or replacement. Should an issue with the pneumatic system arise, call
V-Tek Service for assistance.

Caution!
The TM-402 air supply should be adjusted to operate at a maximum working
pressure not exceeding 7.6 bar (110 psi). The maximum permissible source
pressure should not exceed 9 bar (130 psi). Failure to set the within these lim-
its could result in a failure in the pneumatic system which could lead to injury.

Lubrication
No lubrication is required or desired on the TM-402 as all parts are no maintenance in this regard
and the use of lubricants could interfere with components.

General Maintenance Tasks D292105.10a.fm


Chapter 8: Maintenance 8- 5

Pick Head Maintenance


Nozzle Tip
Inspect the nozzle tip daily for excessive wear or damage. Remove and replace as necessary.
See Chapter 4: Machine Setup for instructions on changing the nozzle tip.

Vacuum Levels.
Check Vacuum levels weekly. This recorded information on high/
low vacuum levels is useful on a week to week basis and can indi-
cate pneumatic problems such as loose fittings or seal problems.

1. Turn on the vacuum generator from the HMI.

2. Observe and record vacuum level for the nozzle with no part
present.

3. Cover the nozzle (with part or some object) and record vac-
uum levels.

4. Compare the current vacuum levels with those previously recorded. A partially blocked
nozzle or restricted filter in the nozzle assembly is indicated by a smaller vacuum swing.

5. Remove and replace the nozzle vacuum filter if there are high vacuum levels without part
or poor pickup.

Replace the Vacuum Filter


If parts are not picking consistently or if the Nozzle Vacuum
Sensor indicates there is a part on the Nozzle (values appear
green) without a part on the nozzle, this is an indicator that the
Vacuum Filter needs to be cleaned or replaced. Typically the
Vacuum Filter will require attention after 200-300 hours of
operation.

The Vacuum Filter is located on top of the Pick Head Assem-


bly.

1. Open the front door and manually move the pick head
all the way to the front for easy access.

D292105.10a.fm General Maintenance Tasks


8-6 TM-401 User’s Guide

2. Remove the air line from the Nozzle Shank.

3. Use a needle-nose pliers to remove the air line from


the Upper Filter Fitting which is located at the top of
the Vacuum Filter.

4. Use a 2.5mm Hex wrench to remove the retaining


screw that holds the Filter in place.

5. Lift the Filter from the housing and remove it from the
machine.

6. Blow air through the filter to clean it or replace with a


new filter. (See Spare Parts List in the back of this
User’s Guide for order information.).

7. Replace the Filter on the Pick Head, reconnecting the


air line at the top of the Vacuum Filter and at the Noz-
zle Shank.

General Maintenance Tasks D292105.10a.fm


Chapter 8: Maintenance 8- 7

Check Actuator Belt Tension


The Actuator Belt tension should be measured after its first 30-40 hours of run time, then annu-
ally after that. To measure belt tension, follow the instructions below.

1. Position the Pick Head Carrier so the edge of the carrier is 6" from the inside end of the
Actuator Head.

6”

2. Position a force gauge on the Belt 2” from the inside end of the Actuator Head.

2”

3. Deflect the Belt 1/4" (6 mm) in either direction. The force gauge should read between 12
and 16 lbs. [53 - 62 N].

Deflect 1/4”

Note: Contact V-TEK Service for tensioning procedure if belt tension is outside tolerance.

D292105.10a.fm General Maintenance Tasks


8-8 TM-401 User’s Guide

Taping Module Maintenance


Heat Sealer
Heat sealer maintenance consists mainly of cleaning built-up debris and adhesive residues from
the heat shoes. It should be cleaned after every 120 hours of operation or as needed.

To clean the heat shoes, follow the steps below.

1. Slide the loading track all the way out.

2. If the sealer assembly is still hot, allow it to cool completely before continuing.

Note: Do not attempt to use alcohol when the sealer Remove


is hot.

3. Using a 3/32” hex wrench, remove the (3) Button


Head Cap Screws and the red Thumb Screw from
the two sheet metal covers.

Remove

General Maintenance Tasks D292105.10a.fm


Chapter 8: Maintenance 8- 9

4. Clean the residues from the heat shoes by


using a plastic or brass brush soaked in alco-
hol to remove any residue that has built up on Heat Shoe
the lip of the heat shoe.

Note: Do not use a steel bristled brush. It could


damage the heat shoes.
Remove
Residue

Remove/Replace Heat Shoes


Remove heat shoes every four months and inspect and clean them. Replace if necessary.

1. Ensure the heater is off and has cooled completely.

2. Remove the outer heat sealer guard as described above.

3. Use a 5/64 inch hex wrench to release the shoe from the heat sealer assembly.

4. Use a 5/64 inch hex wrench to unscrew the set screws on both ends of the heat shoe so
the heater and the thermocouple can be removed.

5. Insert the heater and the thermocouple in a new heat shoe, aligning them so their ends
are flush with the end of the heat shoe. Tighten the set screws to hold them in position.

6. Place the heat shoe back on the sealer assembly and tighten the set screw.

7. Replace the outer sealer guard.

D292105.10a.fm General Maintenance Tasks


8-10 TM-401 User’s Guide

Loading Track.
The Loading Track should be cleared of dust and
debris after every 40 hours of operation.

Strip the machine, remove the cover tape guide, and brush the dust and debris from the track
with a small, stiff bristled paint brush. Excessive build-up of dirt and debris can cause carrier tape
jams.

PSA Sealer
The adhesive residues should be cleaned from the sealer
assembly every 40 hours of operation. PSA Sealer Wheels

Wipe the entire assembly using a cloth soaked in alcohol. Using


a cotton swab soaked in alcohol, clean between the sealer
wheels. Also, clean the entire surface of the black polyurethane
wheel.

Note: Do not use solvents other than alcohol when


cleaning the black polyurethane wheels.

If during the cleaning process the sealer has become com-


pletely out of adjustment, turn the small screw behind the wheel
counterclockwise approximately three turns. Slowly turn the
screw clockwise while spinning the top wheel. Stop adjusting
when the bottom wheel starts spinning with the top wheel.

Cover Tape Guide Cover Tape Guide


The Cover Tape Guide may become coated with adhesive and
dirt during taping. It is important to keep the tape groove clean
for proper alignment of the cover tape.

Clean the tape groove with alcohol and a cotton swab whenever
it appears dirty. The recommended cleaning schedule is every
40 hours of operation.

General Maintenance Tasks D292105.10a.fm


Appendix A: Sensors

Contents

Keyence FS-N11CVP/FS-N12CP Sensor Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2


SMC ZSE30 Vacuum Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Appendix A: Sensors A-2

Keyence FS-N11CP & FSN12CP Sensor Amplifiers


The Keyence FS-N11CP and FS-N12CP sensor amplifiers
(shown in Figure A.1 below) are used on the TM-400 Series
machines for the Low Cover Tape Sensor and the Tape Jam
Sensor. Both amplifiers are mounted on the Cover Tape
Arm. The Low Cover Tape amplifier (FS-N11CP) is located
on the left. The Tape Jam amplifier (FS-N12CP) is located
on the right.

The two amplifiers are designed to be attached electrically


and share power. Otherwise, the two units function indepen-
dently of one another.

Fiber Lock Lever Set Button Preset Value (PV) Indicator Manual Button Output Selector
Button

Figure A.1

Operation Indicator Current Value (CV) indicator Mode Button

Selecting the Output Mode


The FS-N11CP/FS-N12CP sensor-amplifiers can be set to two Output Modes: light-ON or dark-
ON. This determines under what conditions the sensor is triggered and the Operation Indicator is
lit.

In light-ON mode, the sensor will be triggered when the current value (CV) of detected light from
the emitter is higher than the preset value (PV). In dark-ON mode, the sensor is triggered when
the CV of detected light is lower than the PV. Essentially, in light-ON Output Mode the sensor
detects when an obstruction occurs (causing reflected light to increase) and in dark-ON Output
Mode the sensor detects when an obstruction is removed (causing reflected light to decrease).

1. Press the Output Selector button. The CV Indicator will display the current mode.

2. Press the Manual button within 5 seconds of having pressed the Output Selector button.
The Output Mode will be toggled.

Keyence FS-N11CP & FSN12CP Sensor Amplifiers D291842.11.fm


A-3 Appendix A: Sensors

3. The CV Indicator will return to its normal display after 5 seconds have elapsed.

Locking the Keys


It is sometimes desirable to lock the keys of the sensor amplifiers so that the currents settings are
not inadvertently changed.

1. Hold down the Manual button and the Mode button simultaneously for at least three sec-
onds.

2. The CV indicator will display Loc to indicate that the lock is in place.

3. Repeat the same procedure to unlock the keys. The display will flash the message unL.

Two-point Calibration
1. With an obstructing object between the sensors (ideally, a full reel of cover tape), press
and release the SET button. The PV Indicator will be lit.

2. Remove the obstruction between the sensors and press SET again. The amplifier will
return to its normal operating mode. The number shown on the PV Indicator should
change.

3. If the sensor is in dark-ON mode, the operation indicator should be lit while there is an
obstruction between the sensors. If the sensor is in light-ON mode, the operation indica-
tor should be lit while there is no obstruction between the sensors.

Keyence FS-N11CP & FSN12CP Sensor Amplifiers D291842.11.fm


Appendix A: Sensors A-4

SMC ZSE30 Vacuum Sensor


The SMC ZSE30 Vacuum Sensor functions as a Pick & Place Head part present sensor. It com-
pares the vacuum pressure at the pick and place nozzle to a threshold point.

When the vacuum pressure drops beneath this level the sensor sends an OFF signal to the
machine (the LCD display will be green). When the vacuum rises above the threshold, the sensor
sends an ON signal to the machine (the LCD screen will be red).

Pressure Reading Display

Down Arrow Button Up Arrow Button

Set Button

Adjusting the Vacuum Sensor


If the machine places “empty” pockets (i.e., places as though it held a part when it did not) or
returns a picking part error when it picked a part, the vacuum sensor’s threshold point probably
needs to be adjusted.

To adjust the threshold point, follow these instructions:

1. With no part on the nozzle and the vacuum ON, note the reading on the vacuum sensor.
Example: -60.5.

2. Press the Set button. The sensor will alternately flash n_1 and the current setting. This is
the threshold point.

3. Using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons, adjust the value of n_1 to about 5 less
than the pressure reading that was noted with no part on the nozzle. Example: -60.5 - 5 =
-65.5.

4. Press the Set button again. The sensor will now display the h (hysteresis) setting. This
should read 0.0.

5. Press the Set button again to exit back to Normal Operation mode. Run the machine and
observe if the vacuum sensor is functioning properly.

6. If the machine places empty pockets, set the threshold point closer to the pressure read-
ing when a part is on the nozzle. If the machine fails to detect a part on the nozzle when

SMC ZSE30 Vacuum Sensor D291842.11.fm


A-5 Appendix A: Sensors

one is present, set the threshold closer to the pressure reading when no part is on the
nozzle. In this way, the optimum setting for each specific part can be reached.

Initial Factory Settings


If for some reason the sensor needs to be re-initialized to the default factory settings, follow the
steps below:

1. Press and hold the Set button for at least two seconds. The sensor will enter initialization
mode. The first setting to appear will be the Indication Unit setting. This should be set to
PA. Use the Up Arrows and Down Arrows to adjust this, if necessary.

2. Press the Set button to advance to the Display Color setting. This should be set to Sor
(Red/ON).

3. The next setting is the Operation mode setting. This should be set to HyS (hysteresis).

4. The next setting is the Output mode setting. This should be set to nC (normally closed). If
this setting is incorrect, the sensor will function backwards, such that the machine will not
detect a part when is on the nozzle and detect a part when no part is present.

5. The next setting is the Response Time setting. This should be set to 2.5.

6. The final setting is the Auto Preset setting. This should be set to mAn (manual).

7. Press the Set button to return to Normal Operation mode.

SMC ZSE30 Vacuum Sensor D291842.11.fm


Appendix A: Sensors A-6

SMC ZSE30 Vacuum Sensor D291842.11.fm


TM-402 Suggested Spare Parts List
Part Number Description Qty
102534 Reset Switch Contact 1
102597 Digital Pressure Switch 1
105786 Take-up Motor 1
200401 Sealer Air Regulator 1
200636 Solenoid Air Valve 1
201026 Pick & Place Vacuum Air Filter 1
201207 Convum Vacuum Cup 1
201280 Nozzle Cup A3, 60 x 30 2
209250 Pick & Place Spring 1
201271 SPT Vacuum Cup 1
201297 Large Quad Vacuum Cup 1
201298 Medium Quad Vacuum Cup 1
201299 Small Quad Vacuum Cup 1
210019 Taper Timing belt 1
210109 Pick & Place Timing Belt 1
212001 Solenoid O-Rings 3
212008 Taper Idler O-Ring 2
212025 Nozzle O-Rings 2
244010 Taper Thermocouple 2
244012 Taper Heater 2
261122 Heat Shoe 1
266737 Taper Drive Sprocket 1
292464 Convum Nozzle Kit 1
292465 Quad Nozzle Kit 1
292467 SPT Nozzle Kit 1
290603 Taper Upper PSA Wheel Assembly 2
500440 Vision Sensor Amplifier 1

D292105.12a.fm
Spare Parts List TM-401 User’s Guide

Caution!
Only genuine spares should be used on the TM-402. Failure to
use genuine spare parts could render the machine unsafe and
void factory warranty.

D292105.12a.fm
TM-402 Exploded Views
Document List
TM-402 Assembly, 240 Volt Bowl Pages 1 - 6 291683.slddrw

Base Assembly Pages 1 - 7 291680.slddrw

Electrical Panel, 240 Volt Bowl Pages 1 - 5 291668.slddrw

Guard Assembly Page 1 - 4 291684.slddrw

Pick & Place Assembly Pages 1 - 8 291822.slddrw


Pick & Place Head Pages 1 - 2 291665.slddrw
Nozzle Overtravel Assembly Pages 1 - 2 292749.slddrw
Pick & Place Head Frame Pages 1 - 2 292750.slddrw
Pick & Place Head Frame Pages 1 - 2 292751.slddrw
Guard Assembly Pages 1 - 4 291671.slddrw
Nozzle Set Long Page 1 of 1 292756.slddrw

Taper Pages 1 - 3 291674.slddrw


Taper Base Pages 1 - 5 291675.slddrw
Taper Motor Enclosure Pages 1 - 3 291676.slddrw
Inner Seal PSA & Heat Pages 1 - 2 291624.slddrw
Outer Seal PSA & Heat Pages 1 - 2 291626.slddrw
Front Track Assembly Pages 1 - 2 291678.slddrw
Cover Tape Assembly Pages 1 - 2 291583.slddrw
Cover Tape Guide Pages 1 - 2 290942.slddrw
Carrier Tape Arm Pages 1 - 2 290945.slddrw
Take-up Arm Pages 1 - 2 292049.slddrw

240 Volt Bowl Assembly Pages 1 - 5 291765.slddrw

Keyence IV 2D Camera Pages 1 - 2 292050.slddrw

Frame Assembly (Optional) Pages 1 - 6 291667.slddrw

Crate Pages 1 - 6 291693.slddrw


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/12/2013 PVO

D 2873 B REPLACE ASSEMBLY 291669 WITH ASSEMBLY 292050 8/10/2015 RH D

2904 C REPLACED 292050,291668 WITH 292324,291327 7/21/2016 PVO

2954 D UPDATE LOGO DECALS 7/17/2017 PVO

3099 E ADDED NOZZLE KIT 292755 TO THE BOM 3/5/2019 PVO

C C

56.50 35.44

B B
38.76

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 240V BOWL
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291683 E
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 384.83 SHEET 1 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

291668 C

C C

291680

B B

ITEM NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY

4 221745 SHCS SS M5 X 16 4

7 291668 TM402 ELECTRICAL PANEL (BOWL 240V) 1

9 291680 TM-402 BASE (BOWL) 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 240V BOWL
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291683 E
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 384.83 SHEET 2 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

291822

C C

B B

3 3

291674 ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

3 221733 SS SHCS M4X16 31

7 291674 TM-400 TAPER ASSEMBLY 1


NOTE:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
THIS IS THE FINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE 11 291822 1

TM-400 P&P ASSEMBLY (291822) AS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE

NOTED ON THE ASSEMBLY DRAWING. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES


TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005
DRAWN RH 9/11/13
THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 240V BOWL
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291683 E
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 384.83 SHEET 3 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C
3

NOTE:
THIS IS THE FINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE
TM-402 BASE ASSEMBLY (291680) AND
THE TM-400 P&P ASSEMBLY (291822)AS
NOTED ON THE ASSEMBLY DRAWING.

B B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

2 221731 SHCS SS M4 X 12 6

3 221733 SS SHCS M4X16 31


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
3 .XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 240V BOWL
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291683 E
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 384.83 SHEET 4 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTE:
D
D THIS IS THE FINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE
291684
P&P ASSEMBLY (291822) AS NOTED
ON THE ASSEMBLY DRAWING.
6

292050 B C

C C

B B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 221714 SHCS SS M3 X 16 5

1 5 223730 BHCS SS M4 X 10 8

6 223733 BHCS SS M4 X 16 5

10 291684 TM-402 GUARD ASSEMBLY (BOWL) 1

13 292050 OVER TAPE CAMERA ASSEMBLY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 240V BOWL
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291683 E
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 384.83 SHEET 5 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C

291765

B B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

11 291765 TM402 240V BOWL ASSY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 240V BOWL
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291683 E
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 384.83 SHEET 6 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/11/2013 PVO

D 2895 B ADDED PART #103058 6/30/2016 PVO D

2920 C REPLACE 105830 WITH 105926 1/12/2017 PVO

2954 D REPLACE 111160 WITH 111177 7/17/2017 PVO

C C

35.22 30.82
B B

10.34

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 BASE (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291680 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 80.36 SHEET 1 OF 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

34 50

31
51 45
35
47
C C

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

29 217211 FEET POLY 4

31 221733 SS SHCS M4 x 16mm 34

34 221745 SS SHCS M5 x 16mm 8


B B
35 221754 SS SHCS M6 x 12mm 4

46 31 45 267021 BUMPER MOUNT 20


48
46 267050 TM400 LOWER BASEPLATE (FRONT) 1
29
34 47 267051 TM400 LOWER BASEPLATE (REAR) 1

34 48 267052 JOINING PLATE 1


49
49 267053 TM400 BASE SIDE (RIGHT) 1

50 267054 TM400 BASE SIDE (LEFT) 1

51 267055 ELECTRICAL PANEL MOUNT 2


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 BASE (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291680 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 80.36 SHEET 2 OF 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

26 24

D D

6 23 4

42 5

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

7 1 101906 FILTER RFI 30A 1

18 3 102528 SWITCH ESTOP 1

30 4 102534 SWITCH CONTACT BLOCK (NO) 1


3
33
5 102535 SWITCH CONTACT BLOCK (NC) (2) 1
19
17 6 102570 SWITCH - MAIN POWER 1
C 41 20 C
7 102586 SWITCH RESET 1

40 13 104158 TERM BLOCK 4

14 104159 TERM JUMPER 2

15 104160 TERM END CAP 3

17 107112 CABLE CLAMP 9/16-.203 HOLE 6

18 111008 SAFETY STICKER E-STOP W/ROTA 1

19 113001 FAN 1

38 20 113003 FAN FILTER ASSEMBLY 1

23 200294 AIR FITTING 1/4" EXHAUST MUFFL 1


44
24 200367 ONE TOUCH FITTING, SMC 010 2
B B
26 200685 VALVE, DUMP; SOFT START 1
DETAIL A
30 30 221730 SS SHCS M4 x 10mm 6
1
13 33 221741 SS SHCS M5 x 8mm 6

38 223754 SS BHCS M6 x 10mm 2

40 225738 SS FHCS M4 x 50mm 4


14 41 239104 SS M4 NUT 4

42 246542 FITTING, KQ2 INCH SIZE 1

44 266776 BOWL ASSEMBLY DIN RAIL 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
15 BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

DETAIL A GENERAL NOTES:


TM-402 BASE (BOWL)
TERMINAL BLOCK - INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV
SCALE 1:5
B 291680 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 80.36 SHEET 3 OF 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTE:
THE PANELVIEW (105926) AND THE TM-400 FRONT
PANEL (267057) SHOULD NOT BE PLACED UNTIL
THE FINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE TM-402 (291683).

D D

17 C

55

C C
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

2 101908 FILTER AC ENTRY FUSED 1

8 102621 FUSE HOLDER 4

11 103058 RECEPT AMP 4 PIN 1

12 103215 CONNECTOR PANEL MOUNT RJ-45 1

37 13 103586 POTENTIOMETER 2

17 105926 PANELVIEW 1

23 200281 AIR FITTING, 1/4" MALE COUPLER 1

25 200367 ONE TOUCH FITTING, SMC 010 2

8 26 200433 AW20-N02BG-Z 1
B B
39 28 207054 SPACER 20 SERIES 1
37 25
29 217049 VHS20-N01-Z 1
13
12 28 37 223711 SS BHCS M3 x 6mm 24
29 26
38 11 41 23
38 223712 SS BHCS M3 x 8mm 4
B
57 39 223743 SS BHCS M5 x 12mm 2

41 224035 SS FHCS M3 x 8mm 2


2 1 (HEAT SHRINK)
55 267057 TM400 FRONT PANEL 1

57 267059 TM400 REAR PANEL 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 BASE (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291680 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 80.36 SHEET 4 OF 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTE:
THE D SUB 37 PIN (F) (103020), RECEPTICAL (157030),
SMC PART #(KK25-06E) (249968), AND THE TM-400 MID 9
PANEL (267058) SHOULD NOT BE PLACED UNTIL THE 10
DFINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE TM-402 (291683). 54 D

56
36

21 43
45

32

57 52
C C

32

31

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

9 103012 D SUB MOUNTING HEX POST (2) 2

10 103020 D SUB 37 PIN (F) 1

21 157030 RECEPTICAL 1

31 221733 SS SHCS M4 x 16mm 34


B B
32 221735 SS SHCS M4 x 20mm 16

36 223711 SS BHCS M3 x 6mm 24

43 249968 SMC PART # (KK2S-06E) 1

45 267021 BUMPER MOUNT 20

52 267056 PANEL MOUNT 4

54 267058 TM400 MID PANEL 1

56 267060 SHOULDER BOLT RECEIVER (1/2'' PLATE) 2

36 57 267077 TM400 INPUT PLATE (BOWL) 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 BASE (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291680 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 80.36 SHEET 5 OF 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTE:
THE BUMPER MOUNTS (267021) SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE
UNDER SIDE OF THE TM-400 TAPER BASEPLATE (267069)DURING
D
THE FINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE TM-402 (291683). D

36 45

C C

B B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

36 223711 SS BHCS M3 x 6mm 24

45 267021 BUMPER MOUNT 20


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 BASE (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291680 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 80.36 SHEET 6 OF 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P200685

D D

P217049 P200433

TO 291665
TO 291674

TO 291666
C C

B B

P249968

FROM 291674 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN PVO 9/4/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 BASE PNEUMATICS DRAWING
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291680 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.00 SHEET 7 OF 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/10/2013 PVO

D 2873 B ADD 1x 104178 8/10/2015 RH D

2946 C REPLACE 102595 WITH TWO 102614S 5/9/2017 PVO

3132 D REPLACED TWO 102614S WITH ONE 102595 (SAME AS 4/22/2019 PVO
REV. B)

C C

B B

ELECTRICAL PANEL SIDE A ELECTRICAL PANEL SIDE B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM402 ELECTRICAL PANEL (BOWL 240V)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291668 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 16.81 SHEET 1 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

22

D 21 D

20

19

DETAIL A DETAIL B
C C
WIRE CHASE ATTACHMENT DIN RAIL ATTACHMENT
SCALE 1:3 SCALE 1:3

27

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY


B B
19 223749 BHCS SS M6X8 5

24 20 223750 SHBS SS M5 X 16 12

21 238044 M5 SS FLAT WASHER 24

22 239105 M5 SS HEX NUT 12

24 267029 TM-400 ELECTRICAL PANEL 1

25 267030 TM-400 DIN RAIL - SHORT 1


26 25
26 267031 TM-400 WIRE CHASE #1 3
ELECTRICAL PANEL SIDE A
27 267032 TM-400 WIRE CHASE #2 4
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM402 ELECTRICAL PANEL (BOWL 240V)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291668 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 16.81 SHEET 2 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

BLOCK OF 2
5 5 6 BLOCK OF 8 9 9 9 BLOCK OF 2 3

C C

B B
2 10 10 ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

2 102198 RELAY ELECTROGUIDE 1

3 102595 SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY 1


ELECTRICAL PANEL SIDE A 5 103580 RODIX CE-44-240V 2

6 103581 CE POWER LINE INPUT FILTER 1

8 104157 TERMINAL GROUND BLOCK 8

9 104158 TERM BLOCK 36

10 104160 TERM END CAP 9


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM402 ELECTRICAL PANEL (BOWL 240V)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291668 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 16.81 SHEET 3 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

22

D 21 D

20

19

DETAIL A DETAIL B
WIRE CHASE ATTACHMENT DIN RAIL ATTACHMENT
C SCALE 1:3 SCALE 1:3 C

24
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
B B
27 19 223749 BHCS SS M6X8 5

20 223750 SHBS SS M5 X 16 12

21 238044 M5 SS FLAT WASHER 24

22 239105 M5 SS HEX NUT 12

24 267029 TM-400 ELECTRICAL PANEL 1

26 267031 TM-400 WIRE CHASE #1 3


26 28
27 267032 TM-400 WIRE CHASE #2 4

ELECTRICAL PANEL SIDE B 28 267033 TM-400 DIN RAIL - LONG 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM402 ELECTRICAL PANEL (BOWL 240V)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291668 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 16.81 SHEET 4 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

14
ATTACH TOGETHER

15
D D

REMOVE COVERS

0.750" MIMIMUM DETAIL C


C
SPACE FOR CABLE ASSEMBLY DETAIL C
BLOCK OF 11 BLOCK OF 18 SCALE 1:3
1 7 9 23 9 9 BLOCK OF 3 1 12 15 18
BLOCK OF 8

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 102173 RELAY SAFETY MONITOR 1

4 102640 BUZZER 1

7 104139 TERMINAL BLOCK, FUSE MODULE 8

9 104158 TERM BLOCK 36

10 104160 TERM END CAP 9

B 11 104178 PLC RELAY OPTOCOUPLER 24VDC 4

12 105117 INTERLOCK SWITCH CONTROL UNIT 1


B B
13 105813 2 CHANNEL THERMOCOUPLE PLUG IN 1

14 105814 A-B 2080-LC50-24QBB 1

15 105832 A-B 2085-IRT4 1

16 105828 MICRO 800 ISOLATED 1

17 105829 MICRO 800 MEMORY 1

18 105833 BUS TERMINATOR MODULE 1


NOTE:
10 10 4 10 11 14 17 16 13 1 29 THIS COMPONENT IS PART
BLOCK OF 4 B OF THE CAMERA ASSEMBLY 23 246539 SMC PART # (KQ2U07-00) 1

29 500440 VISION SENSOR AMPLIFIER 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
ELECTRICAL PANEL SIDE B DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM402 ELECTRICAL PANEL (BOWL 240V)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291668 D
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 16.81 SHEET 5 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 6/27/14 PVO

D 2909 B REPLACE 110012 WITH 268942 7/22/2016 PVO D

2945 C REPLACE 110011, 268942 WITH 110013, 110014, 110015, 5/15/2017 PVO
110016

D UPDATED REVISION TO MATCH GSS 12/10/2018 PVO

3099 E REPLACE P&P HEAD 291665 WITH 292752 3/5/2019 PVO

3134 F REPLACE 267433 WITH 270113 & REPLACE 110013, 4/24/2019 pvo
110014, 110015, 110016 WITH 110018

C C

8.61

32.75

B B

30.091

8.70

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 1 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

47

29 31
49
25

C 27 C
56

46

45 ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

25 221706 SHCS SS M2.5 X 16 9

27 221713 SHCS SS M3 X 12 4

43 29 221721 SHCS SS M2.5 X 10 4

44 30 221731 SHCS SS M4 X 12 21

31 221733 SS SHCS M4X16 16


B B
43 267015 P&P ENCLOSURE LOWER (REAR) 1

44 267016 P&P ENCLOSURE LOWER (FRONT) 1


29
45 267017 E-CHAIN MOUNT 1

46 267018 HEAD ENCLOSURE, FRONT 1

47 267019 HEAD ENCLOSURE, REAR 1

30 25 49 267021 BUMPER MOUNT 6

56 267414 P&P BRIDGE PLATE 1

59 292752 P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 2 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

15 12 14

13

26
5
7

C C

16

8
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

5 104994 SUNX PM-R45P 1


32
7 107108 CABLE CLAMP 5/16-.203 4
8
8 107111 CABLE CLAMP 1/2-.203 HOLE 10

9 107112 CABLE CLAMP 9/16-.203 HOLE 1


7
10 107113 CABLE CLAMP 3/4-.203 HOLE 1
B 8 B
9
12 200259 AIR FITTING 10-32 X 1/16 TB ELBOW 1

13 200260 AIR FIT 90 DEG 10-32 X 1/8 TB 2

8 8 14 200267 AIR FIT 1/8NPT FEMALE X 1/8TB 1


32
8 15 200401 AIR REGULATOR SMC ARJ210-M5 1
10
16 200801 GUAGE PRESSURE GP-100 1

26 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 2

32 221741 SHCS SS M5 X 8 16

59 292752 P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 3 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4 3 4

D D
DETAIL A
35

40

42

1 1 1
BLOCK OF 2 BLOCK OF 4 BLOCK OF 11

DETAIL A
TERMINAL BLOCK
C SCALE 1:1.5 C

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

2 104158 TERM BLOCK 17

3 104159 TERM JUMPER 3


30
4 104160 TERM END CAP 4

18 204051 BEARING, 3/8ID X 7/8OD 8


B 19 B
19 204138 McMASTER CARR 92725A550 4
18 (1) LT 609 30 221731 SHCS SS M4 X 12 21

48 35 223749 BHCS SS M6X8 4

40 238045 M6 SS FLAT WASHER 2


18 (1) LT 609
42 266776 BOWL ASSEMBLY DIN RAIL 1

51 48 267020 P&P BEARING MOUNT 4

51 267025 IDELR SHAFT 4

59 292752 P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 4 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PACK THE LINEAR BEARING BLOCK


WITH SUPER LUBE MULTI-PURPOSE
D D

GREASE.

C C

28
17 2

B B
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

17 202090 RAIL, HIWIN 622 MM 1

24 217210 RUBBER FOOT 2

28 221714 SHCS SS M3 X 16 11
33
31 221733 SS SHCS M4X16 16
24
31 49 33 223711 BHCS SS M3 X 6 6

49 267021 BUMPER MOUNT 6

59 292752 P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 5 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTE:
ADHESIVE ON LIGHT STRIP TO GO
SIDE ON LIGHT BAR THAT ATTACHES
TO THE P&P BRIDGE PLATE. LIGHT
STRIP TO BE CENTERED IN LIGHT BAR.
D 57 D
56

57

55
55

30

DETAIL B
SECTION VIEW
C C
1 LIGHT STRIP ATTACHMENT
SCALE 1:2
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 22970 AS CUP SET M4 x 6mm 6

6 105827 MOTOR DRIVE FOR NEMA 24 1


(3) LT 242 22
20 207025 SHIM, 3/8 ID, 9/16 OD, .010 THICK 4
1 21 210109 GATES 770XL037 1

50 22 211058 PULLEY TIMING 18 TEETH MISUMI 2


20
30 221731 SHCS SS M4 X 12 21
22
31 221733 SS SHCS M4X16 16
1
21 38 230024 AS CUP SET 10-32 x 1/4 2
B B
50 267022 BELT IDLER 2

52 267162 MOTOR NUT 2


6
53 267163 P&P DRIVE PULLEY 1
31 54 267246 P&P MOTOR MOUNT 1

55 267247 LED LIGHT STRIP 1

56 267414 P&P BRIDGE PLATE 1


38 53
52 57 267415 LED LIGHT BAR 1

59 292752 P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY 1


54
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
TITLE:
NOTE: BEND 0.5
SURFACE: 63
MOTOR PARTS WILL BE ATTACHED TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
WHEN INSTALLING P&P ASSEMBLY GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
ONTO BASE ASSEMBLY (291672). - BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 6 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

NOTE:
THIS IS THE FINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE PICK & PLACE
HEAD (291665) AS NOTED ON THE ASSEMBLY
DRAWING.

36

C C

?
SECTION VIEW
SCALE 1:3

B B

36

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

36 225731 FHCS SS M4 X 12 4

59 292752 P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 7 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D
NOTE:
11 THE P&P COVER (267026), TOWER LIGHT
(110018), SHOULD NOT BE PLACED UNTIL
THE FINAL ASSEMBLY OF THE MACHINE.
39

33

41 34

58
C C

34

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

11 110018 TOWER LIGHT 1

23 211535 E-CHAIN 400 1


B B
33 223711 BHCS SS M3 X 6 6

34 223712 BHCS SS M3 X 8 15

35 223749 BHCS SS M6X8 4

36 223753 BHCS SS M6 X 12 2

39 238042 M3 STAINLESS WASHER 3

41 239103 SS M3 NUT 3

35 58 270113 P&P COVER 1

59 292752 P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 6/5/2014
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
36 SURFACE: 63
23
GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.75 SHEET 8 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

200801

200401

C C

FROM 291672 TO 291665

B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/10/12
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PNEUMATICS PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291822 F
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.00 SHEET 9 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 8/22/2013 PVO

D D

C C

5.35
7.83

B B

7.30

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 1 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

44 28
D D

46

25
C C
53
49

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

4 200153 BUMPER 2

25 219041 3/16 X 1/2 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 2


B B
34 27 221712 SHCS SS M3 X 10 2
50
28 221713 SHCS SS M3 X 12 5

34 225714 FHCS SS M3 X 12 2

27 44 267004 P&P BACKPLATE 1

46 267006 CYLINDER MOUNT 1

49 267009 UPPER STOP 1

50 267010 LOWER STOP 1

53 267013 P&P MANIFOLD 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 2 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

11 45

D D

29

12

(2) LT 262 5 20 52 10

32
28
C C

15
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

8 200253 10-32 x 1/16 HOSE BARB 10

10 200259 AIR FITTING 10-32 X 1/16 TB ELBOW 1

11 200261 AIR FIR 10-32 TEE TO 1/16" TB 1

12 200273 AIR FIT 5/32 TB 10-32 MALE 1

15 201026 FILTER 1
B B
20 209101 SPRING ANCHOR 2

26 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 7

28 221713 SHCS SS M3 X 12 5

29 221716 SHCS SS M3 X 20 2
3 41
32 223728 BHCS SS M4 X 6 1

41 249974 HIWINN MGN-15 BLOCK 1

45 267005 VACUUM GENERATOR MODIFICATION 1

52 267012 SPRING ANCHOR MOUNT 1


26
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 3 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

13 3

C C
31

B 2 B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY


42
1 102597 SMC VACUUM SENSOR (ZSE30A-C4L-P- 1
LA2)
2 200062 CYLINDER NUT 2

3 200063 CYLINDER AIR PIN W/O P. SWITCH 2

13 200343 AS 1 2 0 1F-M3-01 (SMC) 6

31 221766 SHCS SS M5 X 5 2

42 266482 CYLINDER BUMPER 2


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 4 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

21

19

C 13 40 C

36 7

(1) LT 609 6 20
43
38

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

13 200343 AS 1 2 0 1F-M3-01 (SMC) 6

19 202523 SMC CRB2BWU10-180SZ 1

20 209101 SPRING ANCHOR 2


B B
33 21 209250 LeeSpring-MS24586-1054 1

26 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 7
SEE SHEET 8 FOR
33 224035 FHCS SS M3 X 8 4
NOZZLE INFORMATION
36 230083 McMASTER CARR 91390A232 2
47
38 231724 M4X4 SS SET SCREW 1

40 239105 M5 SS HEX NUT 2

43 266483 HEAVY WASHER 2


26 47 267007 ROTATE HOUSING 1
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 5 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

5 39

C C
14 4

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

5 200201 FITTING 2
23
6 200207 AIR FIT 10-32 M SS MUFFLER 6
53
8 200253 10-32 x 1/16 HOSE BARB 10
37 (2) LT 262
9 200254 AIR FIT 1/8 BARB X 10-32MALE 2

14 200636 AIR VALVE 5


B B
6 22 210072 BELT COUPLER Misumi-TBCS-XL037 1

23 212001 ORING 5/16 15

26 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 7

30 221731 SHCS SS M4 X 12 6

37 231038 M5 X 5 ALLOY SET SCREW 1


22
39 236062 M2 X 25 SS SLOTTED CHEESE HEAD 10
30 SCREW
51 267011 HOME SENSOR FLAG 1

53 267013 P&P MANIFOLD 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
26 51 9 6 SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 6 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C

35

B B

NOTE:
THE 2 HALVES OF THE PICK & PLACE HEAD WILL BE
ATTACHED TO EACH OTHER WHEN BEING PLACED
ON THE PICK & PLACE ASSEMBLY (291666).

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

35 225731 FHCS SS M4 X 12 2
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 7 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

54
55 48
7

7 7
24

17 16
18

DETAIL A DETAIL B
SPT NOZZLE DETAIL C
C CONVUM NOZZLE QUAD NOZZLE C
SCALE 1:1 SCALE 1:1 SCALE 1:1

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY


B Clippard 11750-2-PKG 3-56 to 1/16” ID B
7 200208 Hose Fitting 3

16 201207 VACUUM CUP PFG-5U 1

17 201271 VACUUM CUP A1 100 1

18 201297 NOZZLE QUAD LARGE VISION 1

24 212025 QUAD NOZZLE O-RING 2

48 267008 TM-400 NOZZLE (CONVUM) 1

54 267090 TM-400 NOZZLE (QUAD) 1

55 267091 TM-400 NOZZLE (SPT) 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/15/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 PICK & PLACE HEAD
COMPLETE NOZZLE SET - INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV
SCALE 2:1
B 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.50 SHEET 8 OF 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

VALVE #1 (BLOW-OFF) F
F
VALVE #5 (PLACE)
200636 VALVE #4 (PICK)
VALVE #3 (VACUUM)
VALVE #2 (ROTATE)
VALVE #1 (BLOW-OFF)
102527

266670
FROM 291822
E E

VALVE #3 (VACUUM)
201032

200636

TO NOZZLE

PICK PLACE
D D

200692
VALVE #2 (ROTATE)
202502

200636
PLUMB ACTUATOR SO IT TURNS
CLOCK-WISE FROM THE TOP
VIEW WHEN THE VALVE IS IN
THE NORMAL POSITION.
200207 200692
200207

C C

200692
VALVE #4 (PICK)

200636 200030 PLUMB THE AIR CYLINDER SO IT


FROM 291672 IS IN THE RETRACTED POSITION
WHEN THE VALE IS IN THE
NORMAL POSITION.
200207 200207 200692
B B

200692
VALVE #5 (PLACE)

200636 200030
PLUMB THE AIR CYLINDER SO IT
IS IN THE RETRACTED POSITION
WHEN THE VALE IS IN THE
NORMAL POSITION.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9 /4 /2 0 1 3
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFO RMATIO N IN TH IS DO CUMENT IS PRO PR IETAR Y AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT
200207 200207 200692 .XX 0.010
P VO ~
MAY NO T B E REPR ODUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PER MISSIO N O F V-TEK INC., MANKATO , MN
A ANGULAR: MACHI NED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 P&P HEAD PNEUMATIC DRAWING
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

C 291665 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.00 SHEET 9 OF 10
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY. REVISIONS

1 200259 AIR FITTING 10-32 X 1/16 TB ELBOW 1 1 ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
2 200343 AS 1 2 0 1F-M3-01 (SMC) 2
A RELEASED 12/7/2018 PVO
3 202523 SMC CRB2BWU10-180SZ 1
4 204174 BALL BEARING 2 16 3118 B CHANGED ANTI-ROTATE PIN & TIMING PULLEY 2/20/2019 PVO
F
F
5 206007 .005'' SHIM 2 3127 C REPLACED 218906 WITH 218907 4/11/2019 PVO

6 209101 SPRING ANCHOR 1


13
7 210063 TIMING BELT 1 17
USE SHIMS AS REQUIRED
8 211068 19 TOOTH TIMING PULLEY 1 TO ACHIEVE .000''-.005''
END PLAY. 5 15
9 216227 COMPRESSION SPRING 1
10 220202 SS SHCS M3 x 35mm 4 19
11 221712 SS SHCS M3 x 10mm 3
3 5 6
12 230008 AS CUP SET M3 x 4mm 1
13 230083 McMASTER CARR 91390A232 2
E E
14 231037 AS CUP SET M2.5 x 4mm 1
23
15 239105 M5 SS HEX NUT 2
16 249006 RETAINING RING 1 8
17 249017 RETAINING RING 1
18 249974 HIWINN MGN-15 BLOCK 1 20
4
19 266483 HEAVY WASHER 2
20 270060 OUTER BUSHING 1 18 PRESS TOP OF PIN
TO THIS SURFACE.
21 270061 NOZZLE SHAFT 1
22 270072 NOZZLE HOUSING 1
D 23 270073 NOZZLE SPACER 1 D
12
24 218907 5/64 X 3/4'' DOWEL PIN 1 2
7

PACK THE LINEAR BEARING


BLOCK WITH SUPER LUBE 24

MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE. 10

INSTALL THE BLOCK SO THE 21

GREASE FITTING IS POINTED


C 22 C

11 9

DOWN. 4
APPLY A VERY THIN
COAT OF SUPER
LUBE MULTI PURPOSE
GREASE TO THE
NOZZLE SHAFT.

PORT "B"
SPRING ANCHOR 14
B PROTRUDES .250'' B
THE ANTI-ROTATE PIN IS
IN THIS POSITION WHEN
PORT "B" IS ACTIVATED. .015'' GAP BETWEEN
ACTUATOR AND PULLEY.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN P VO 1 2 / 7 /2 0 1 8
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 TH E INF OR MATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PR OPRIETARY AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NO T BE REPR O DUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS PER MISSIO N

A .015 .X 0.015 ENG APPR. P VO ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR R OYCE INSTR UMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

BOTTOM VIEW GENERAL NOTES:


- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL
NOZZLE OVERTRAVEL ASSEMBLY
SIZE DWG. NO. REV

C 292749 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.61 SHEET 1 OF 1
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY. REVISIONS

1 102597 SMC VACUUM SENSOR (ZSE30A- 1 ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
C4L-P-LA2)
2 200063 NUT CYLINDER NUT 2 A RELEASED 12/7/2018 PVO

3 200063 AIR CYLINDER 15mm STROKE 2


F
F 4 200153 BUMPER 2
23 17
5 200253 10-32 x 1/16 HOSE BARB 1
6 200259 AIR FITTING 10-32 X 1/16 TB ELBOW 2
7 200261 AIR FIR 10-32 TEE TO 1/16" TB 1
8 200273 AIR FIT 5/32 TB 10-32 MALE 1
9 200343 AS 1 2 0 1F-M3-01 (SMC) 4 7
10 201026 FILTER 1
11 209101 SPRING ANCHOR 1 8
16
12 209250 LeeSpring-MS24586-1054 1
E 13 219041 3/16 X 1/2 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 2 E

14 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 2
15 221712 SHCS SS M3 X 10 2
16 221713 SHCS SS M3 X 12 5 6 16
17 221716 SHCS SS M3 X 20 2
9
18 221766 SHCS SS M5 X 5 2
19 223728 BHCS SS M4 X 6 1
20 225714 FHCS SS M3 X 12 2 3 27

21 266482 CYLINDER BUMPER 2


22 267004 P&P BACKPLATE 1 11
D D
23 267005 VACUUM GENERATOR 1 SPRING ANCHOR
MODIFICATION PROTRUDES .265''
24 267006 CYLINDER MOUNT 1
25 267009 UPPER STOP 1 20
26 267010 LOWER STOP 1 13
12
27 267012 SPRING ANCHOR MOUNT 1
21
28 249974 RAIL LINEAR RAIL 1
5
19 25
22
C C

10

24

26

4
14 28
B B
15

2
18

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN P VO 1 2 / 7 /2 0 1 8
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 TH E INF OR MATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PR OPRIETARY AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NO T BE REPR O DUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS PER MISSIO N
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. P VO ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR R OYCE INSTR UMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
P&P HEAD FRAME
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

C 292750 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 1.03 SHEET 1 OF 1
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY. REVISIONS

1 200201 FITTING 2 ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED


2 200207 AIR FIT 10-32 M SS MUFFLER 6
A RELEASED 12/7/2018 PVO
3 200253 10-32 x 1/16 HOSE BARB 8
1
4 200254 AIR FIT 1/8 BARB X 10-32MALE 2 F
F
5 200636 AIR VALVE 5 3
6 210072 BELT COUPLER Misumi-TBCS-XL037 1
7 212001 ORING 5/16 15
8 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 2
9 221731 SHCS SS M4 X 12 6
10 225731 FHCS SS M4 X 12 2
11 231038 M5 X 5 ALLOY SET SCREW 1 12
12 236062 M2 X 25 SS SLOTTED CHEESE HEAD 10
SCREW
E 13 267011 HOME SENSOR FLAG 1 E

14 267013 P&P MANIFOLD 1 5

7
2

D D
SECURE SET SCREW
WITH RED LOCTITE

11

14

C C
10

13 8

B B
6

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN P VO 1 2 / 7 /2 0 1 8
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 TH E INF OR MATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PR OPRIETARY AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NO T BE REPR O DUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS PER MISSIO N
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. P VO ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR R OYCE INSTR UMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
P&P HEAD FRAME
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

C 292751 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 1.10 SHEET 1 OF 1
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY. REVISIONS

1 292749 NOZZLE OVERTRAVEL ASSEMBLY 1 ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

2 292750 P&P HEAD FRAME 1


A RELEASED 12/7/2018 PVO
3 292751 P&P HEAD FRAME 1
F
F

E E
3

D D

C C
2

B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN P VO 1 2 / 7 /2 0 1 8
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 TH E INF OR MATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PR OPRIETARY AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NO T BE REPR O DUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS PER MISSIO N
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. P VO ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR R OYCE INSTR UMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
P&P HEAD ASSEMBLY
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

C 292752 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 2.74 SHEET 1 OF 2
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

VALVE #1 (BLOW-OFF) F
F
VALVE #5 (PLACE)
200636 VALVE #4 (PICK)
VALVE #3 (VACUUM)
VALVE #2 (ROTATE)

102597
VALVE #1 (BLOW-OFF)

267005

FROM 291822
E E
PLACE
VALVE #3 (VACUUM) CYLINDER
PICK
CYLINDER
200636 201026

TO NOZZLE

ROTARY
ACTUATOR

D 200343 D

VALVE #2 (ROTATE)
202502
200636

PLUMB ACTUATOR SO IT TURNS


CLOCK-WISE FROM THE TOP
VIEW WHEN THE VALVE IS IN
THE NORMAL POSITION.
200207 200207
200343

C C
200343
VALVE #4 (PICK)
200063

200636

PLUMB THE AIR CYLINDER SO IT


FROM 291672 IS IN THE RETRACTED POSITION
WHEN THE VALE IS IN THE
NORMAL POSITION.
200207 200207

B 200343 B
200343
VALVE #5 (PLACE)
200063

PLUMB THE AIR CYLINDER SO IT


200636

IS IN THE RETRACTED POSITION


WHEN THE VALE IS IN THE
NORMAL POSITION.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9 /4 /2 0 1 3
200207 200207 TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 TH E INF OR MATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PR OPRIETARY AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NO T BE REPR O DUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS PER MISSIO N
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. P VO ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR R OYCE INSTR UMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

200343
GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM400 P&P HEAD PNEUMATIC
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SD
IZERAW
DWG.ING.
NO REV

C 292752 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.00 SHEET 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY. REVISIONS

1 201207 VACUUM CUP PFG-5U 1 ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

2 201271 VACUUM CUP A1 100 1


A RELEASED 12/14/2018 PVO
3 201297 NOZZLE QUAD LARGE 1
D D
4 212025 QUAD NOZZLE O-RING 2
5 270077 NOZZLE SHANK QUAD (LONG) 1
6 270078 NOZZLE SHANK CONVUM (LONG) 1
7 270079 NOZZLE SHANK SPT (LONG) 1

C C

4 7

B B

3 1

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 PVO 12/14/2018THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR ROYCE INSTRUMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
2 BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM-400 NOZZLE SET (LONG)
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 292756 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.02 SHEET 1 OF 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/11/2013 PVO

D D

C C

7.50 34.00
B B

9.72
NOTE:
BUILD AS YOU GO
NOT AS OWN ASSEMBLY

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 GUARD ASSEMBLY (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291684 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 10.68 SHEET 1 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

18
28

18
25

C C

NOTE:
BUILD AS YOU GO
7 NOT AS OWN ASSEMBLY
20
13
24 ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
23
7 221706 SHCS SS M2.5 X 16 3
B B
13 223713 BHCS SS M3 X 12 16

18 223736 BHCS SS M4 X 12 16

20 267040 P&P GUARD MOUNT 1

21 267041 P&P GUARD, FILLER, FRONT 1


21
23 267075 P&P ENCLOSURE SIDE, BOWL 1

24 267076 P&P ENCLOSURE FLOOR (BOWL) 1

25 267078 P&P ENCLOSURE TOP (BOWL) 1

28 267422 GUARD BRACKET 5


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 GUARD ASSEMBLY (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291684 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 10.68 SHEET 2 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D
27

NOTE:
BUILD AS YOU GO
13
NOT AS OWN ASSEMBLY
34

C C
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

3 216655 CATCH CATCH 3

4 216655 STRIKE STRIKE PLATE 3


PLATE
5 217309 pull handle 3
33
3 6 219003 1/8 X 3/4 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 12
4 12 11 223009 BHCS SS 4-40 X 1/2 6
19
16 14 12 223711 BHCS SS M3 X 6 6

13 223713 BHCS SS M3 X 12 16
30
14 223714 BHCS SS M3 X 16 2

16 223730 BHCS SS M4 X 10 16
B B
19 225711 FHCS SS M3 X 6 6
13 26 267420 P&P ENCLOSURE DOOR FRONT 1

27 267421 P&P ENCLOSURE DOOR REAR 1


11
30 267432 P&P ENCLOSURE DOOR SIDE, TUBE 1

5 31 267434 HINGE OUTER 6

6 32 267435 HINGE INNER 6

26 33 267436 CATCH MOUNT 2

32 31 34 267437 CATCH MOUNT (SIDE) 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63
DETAIL A TM-402 GUARD ASSEMBLY (BOWL)
HINGE ASSEMBLY GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
SCALE 1:3 - BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291684 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 10.68 SHEET 3 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D NOTE: D
FRONT DOOR PART NUMBER 105116
ARE UPSIDE DOWN, AND USE A
13 DIFFERENT FASTENER TO MOUNT

29
22 1
10

2
17 15
29
1

9
C C
22
1
8

NOTE:
13

BUILD AS YOU GO
NOT AS OWN ASSEMBLY

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 105116 READ HEAD FOR CM-S4; 3 METER 3

2 107106 CABLE CLAMP 1/4 - .203 HOLE 2


B B
8 221731 SHCS SS M4 X 12 4

9 221733 SS SHCS M4X16 4

10 221735 SHCS SS M4 X 20 2

13 223713 BHCS SS M3 X 12 16

15 223729 BHCS SS M4 X 8 2

17 223733 BHCS SS M4 X 16 2

22 267049 SWITCH MOUNT, METRIC 3

29 267423 SWITCH STAND-OFF 6


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/11/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-402 GUARD ASSEMBLY (BOWL)
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291684 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 10.68 SHEET 4 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/6/2013 PVO

2873 B REPLACE TAKE UP ARM (291677) WITH TAKE UP ARM 8/6/2015 RH


D WITH DANCER (292049) D

C C

56.51 16.19

B B

17.63
19.41

1.79
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/6/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291674 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 41255.36 SHEET 1 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D 291583 D

1
292049

291676

C C

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 221002 SHCS SS 4-40 X 3/8 4

2 221174 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 7/8 2


290945
3 223025 BHCS SS 6-32 X 3/8 4
291624 4 223053 BHCS SS 10-32 X 1/2 1

291626 5 290942 TM50 COVER TAPE GUIDE 1


B B
6 290945 TM50 INFEED ARM CARRIER TAPE 1

7 291583 COVER TAPE ASSEMBLY 1

8 291624 TM500 INNER SEAL PSA & HEAT 1

9 291626 TM500 OUTER SEAL PSA & HEAT 1

10 291675 TM-400 TAPER BASE 1

11 291676 TM-400 TAPER MOTOR ENCLOSURE 1


290942
12 291678 FRONT TRACK ASSEMBLY 1

13 292049 TAKE UP ARM (DANCER) 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/6/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
291678 291675 .XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291674 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 41255.36 SHEET 2 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

VALVE #1 VALVE #2

D D

200029 200029

C VALVE #2 C

200692
200636

200030 200030

200207 200207

B B
VALVE #1

200636
200692

FROM 291672

200207 200207
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN PVO 9/4/2013
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM400 TAPER PNEUMATICS DRAWING
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
200401 200801
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291674 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.00 SHEET 3 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/5/2013 PVO

D 2791 B ADD GROMMET (212703) 4/16/2014 RH D

2806 C REMOVE PART #111106 6/18/2014 RH

C C

35.00 13.25

B B

5.27
7.06

1.79

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/5/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER BASE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291675 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 62.2864 SHEET 1 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

32
17
46
49
60
17

47
16 (1) LT 609

C C

31

56
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

6 111006 SAFETY STICKER 1

6 16 204051 BEARING, 3/8ID X 7/8OD 2

17 204053 BEARING, SIMPLICITY FL08 4

31 221029 SHCS SS 8-32 X 3/4 2


B B
32 221030 SHCS SS 8-32 X 3/4 4

36 221065 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 1-1/4 4

46 241003 BALL PLUNGER 1/4-20 2

47 250015 BEARING MOUNT 1

49 250075 THREADED ROD, 1/2-13 X 1 5/8" 2


69
36 56 261043 TRACK SUPPORT BRACKET 1

60 261093 TRACK BEARING MOUNT, TM50 2

69 267069 TM-400 TAPER BASEPLATE 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/5/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER BASE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291675 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 62.2864 SHEET 2 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

4 105123 FIBER OPTIC FU-57TZ 1


41 C 35
55 18 204055 BEARING SFR-188ZZEE 7

20 20 209022 SPRING, TORSION RIGHT HAND WOU 1


53
18 24 212008 ORING 028 NEOPRENE 2
37
54 26 219001 1/8 X 1/2 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 1
24 26
44 27 219002 1/8 X 5/8 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 1

27 28 219015 1/4 X 1 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 4

30 221017 SHCS SS 6-32 X 3/4 2


C C
35 221064 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 1 1
66 48
28 37 223044 BHCS SS 10-24 X 3/8 1
64
40 225001 FHCS SS 4-40 X 1/4 9
30
41 230016 8-32 X 1/8 STEEL SET SCREW 1

43 231019 10-24 X 1/4 SS SET SCREW 1


65 4
43 44 234013 1/4 X 5/8 SLOTTED SHOULDER SCREW 1

48 250016 FLANGE BUSHING MODIFICATION 1


68 50 255590 DRIVE SHAFT 1
40
53 260574 IDLER ARM 1
28
62 54 260576 DRIVE IDLER 1
B B
50 70 55 260577 IDLER ARM SHAFT 1

62 266736 SPROCKET GUARD 1


63
63 266737 DRIVE SPROCKET, 50 PIN 1

64 266738 SHORT TRACK COVER 1

65 266746 SHORT REAR TRACK 1

66 266747 SHORT TRACK COVER #2 1

68 267068 TRACK COVER 1

70 267070 TM-400 TAPER REAR TRACK 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/5/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER BASE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291675 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 62.2864 SHEET 3 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

52 34

67
38

2 58

(1) LT 609 18

19 23
59
C C

57

29

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

18 204055 BEARING SFR-188ZZEE 7

19 207025 SHIM, 3/8 ID, 9/16 OD, .010 THICK 1

23 211018 PULLEY, .080 PITCH X 120 GROOVE 1

42 29 219072 1/4 X 1-3/4 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 2

34 221063 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 3/4 7


B B
38 223061 BHCS 1/4-20 X 5/8 2
(1) LT 609 18
61 42 230023 10-24 X 3/16 STEEL SET SCREW 2

52 258574 FRONT GUIDE SHAFT 2

57 261060 SHAFT, THREADED ADJUSTER 1

58 261062 COVER, SEALER INNER 1

59 261068 SHAFT, IDLER ADJUSTER 1

61 261098 GEAR MODIFICATION, 34T 2

67 266748 TAPE GUIDE MOUNT 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/5/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER BASE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291675 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 62.2864 SHEET 4 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3 3

1 D
D

21
2 51

22 33
BLOCK OF 3 1 1 1 BLOCK OF 4
15
BLOCK OF 2
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
DETAIL A 1 104158 TERM BLOCK 9

DETAIL A 2 104159 TERM JUMPER 3


TERMINAL BLOCK
3 104160 TERM END CAP 4
SCALE 1:2
5 105726 STM23S-2AN 1
C B 25 C
7 200201 FITTING 2

39 8 200207 AIR FIT 10-32 M SS MUFFLER 4

9 200253 10-32 x 1/16 HOSE BARB 2

71 10 200254 AIR FIT 1/8 BARB X 10-32MALE 2

11 200262 AIRFIT 10-32 TEETO 1/8" 1

12 200312 10-32 MALE/6MM PUSH FIT PISCO 1

7 13 200369 PLUG METRIC SIZE 06, SMC 1


9
14 200636 AIR VALVE 2

15 200692 AIR FLOW CONTROL 2

14 21 210019 BELT TIMING (TB20UP6-105) 1


B B
22 211013 PULLEY, 24T 1
11 25 212703 GROMMET 5/16 ID 5/8 OD 1/16 TK 1

33 221045 SHCS SS 10-24 x 5/8 4


12
45
10 34 221063 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 3/4 7
8
34 39 223754 BHCS SS M6X10 2
13
45 238024 FLAT WASHER, 1/4" 2

51 256607 MOTOR MOUNT 1

71 267071 TM-400 TAPER DIN RAIL 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/5/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER BASE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291675 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 62.2864 SHEET 5 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/6/2013 PVO

D D

C C

B 6.98 B

NOTE:
BUILD AS YOU GO
NOT AS OWN ASSEMBLY
10.67 7.06

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/6/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER MOTOR ENCLOSURE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291676 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 3.63 SHEET 1 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

15 17
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
34 1 102611 SWITCH PUSH SPST-NO 10A 120V 2
24 2 103044 PIN AMP (F) (18AWG) 7
D D
3 103063 PLUG AMP 7 PIN 1
19
4 103064 RECEPT AMP 7 PIN AMP 1

25 9 106110 HEX STANDOFF 6-32 500 ALUM 4

12 111004 SAFETY STICKER EX. POINT 1


16 18
13 200259 AIR FITTING 10-32 X 1/16 TB ELBOW 1
14
21 14 200260 AIR FIT 90 DEG 10-32 X 1/8 TB 2
1
15 200267 AIR FIT 1/8NPT FEMALE X 1/8TB 1
31 16 200401 AIR REGULATOR SMC ARJ210-M5 1
26 17 200801 GUAGE PRESSURE GP-100 1

18 217042 KNOB M4 RED 1


C C
13 19 217044 KNOB BLACK 1

NOTE:
20 217416 HOLE PLUG 1/2" BLACK 1

BUILD AS YOU GO
21 221026 SHCS SS 8-32 X 3/8 1
35

NOT AS OWN ASSEMBLY


22 221028 SHCS SS 8-32 x .63 LG 10

24 23 223008 BHCS SS 4-40 X 1/4 8

24 223024 BHCS SS 6-32 X 1/4 13


9 25 223025 BHCS SS 6-32 X 3/8 4
20
38
26 223034 BHCS 8-32 X 3/8 2
27
12
27 239002 6-32 SS HEX NUT 4
23
28 246511 CONDUIT HOUSING, SIZE 11 1
B B
29 261050 SIDE ENCLOSURE LH, TM50 1

37 30 261051 SIDE ENCLOSURE RH, TM50 1

31 263063 SEAL LOCK, SPROCKET SIDE 1


30
34 267066 PANEL, FRONT-BASE MACHINE 1

36 35 267072 TM-400 TAPER REAR PANEL 1


24 36 267073 COVER PLATE LEFT 1

37 267074 COVER PLATE RIGHT 1

38 291719 TM-400 TAKEUP CONTROL BOARD PCBA 1


29 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/6/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010
22 ENG APPR. PVO ~ MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
4 SURFACE: 63
2
GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER MOTOR ENCLOSURE
23 - INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
3
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291676 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
28 MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 3.63 SHEET 2 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

10

7
6

32

33

C C

8
NOTE:
BUILD AS YOU GO
NOT AS OWN ASSEMBLY
11
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
B B
5 104952 FIBER OPTIC FU-35FA 1

6 104987 FS-N11CN_11CP_13CP 1

7 104988 AMPLIFIER EPD 1

8 105807 OP-73864 2

10 107101 CABLE CLAMP 1/8-.140 2

11 107107 CABLE CLAMP 5/16-.203 2

32 263370 EPD MOUNT 1

33 265739 LOW COVER FIBER MOUNT(LONG) 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/6/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 TAPER MOTOR ENCLOSURE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291676 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 3.63 SHEET 3 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
A RELEASE
2836 B REPLACE PART NUMBER 250309 WITH PART NUMBER 11/14/2014 RH
267573

D D

C C

B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 3/19/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. x ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM500 INNER SEAL PSA & HEAT
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291624 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 1.84 SHEET 1 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3 5 27 19 13 11
D D

17 12 7 29 9 1
4
10
23

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY.


1 200029 AIR CYLINDER, SMC CJPB-6-10-B 1
2 200030 SMC AIR CYLINDER, CJPB-15-10 1
16 3 200259 AIR FITTING 10-32 X 1/16 TB ELBOW 2
21 4 204056 BEARING 1/8 ID X 3/8 DIA FLANGED 2
C 5 209051 SPRING, STAINLESS STEEL 1 C
6
6 209244 SPRING; CUSTOM, SS 1
7 219206 DOWEL CRS .125 DIA X .50 LG. 2
20 8 219207 DOWEL PIN CRS 1/8 DIA x 3/4 LG 2
5 9 221005 SHCS SS 4-40 X .75 LG 1
10 223006 BHCS 5-40 X 3/8 2
8 22 11 223053 BHCS SS 10-32 X 1/2 2

8 12 230001 4-40 X 1/8 STEEL SET SCREW 2


13 230018 AS CUP SET 8-32 x 1/4 1
14 230023 10-24 X 3/16 STEEL SET SCREW 1
18 15 230071 10-24 X 5/16 STEEL SET SCREW 2
4
10 25 3 5 16 244010 THERMOCOUPLE 1
17 244012 HEATER WATTLOW 25W 1
18 250159 SEAL ROLLER, LOWER 1
B B
19 260657 HEAT BLOCK 1
20 260666 HEAT BLOCK ISOLATOR 2
21 260669 RETAINING PIN, HEAT SHOE 1
22 261032 SLIDER SHAFT 2

2 7 28 23 261033 UPPER ROLLER MOUNT 1


26 4 6 7 24 261034 HEAD PLATE 1
25 261035 ANIVL - INNER 1
26 261075 BUMPER, 5MM CYLINDER 1
27 261122 HEAT SHOE, ADJUSTABLE SEALER 1
28 261753 BUMPER, 5MM CYLINDER 1
24 2 4 5 29 267573 UPPER SEALL ROLLER 1
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
1 4 5 6 7 TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005
DRAWN RH 3/19/13

8 15 .XX 0.010
ENG APPR. x ~
THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
8 14 3 SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM500 INNER SEAL PSA & HEAT
2 3 7 2 - INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291624 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 1.84 SHEET 2 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

.199 .069

C C

B
DETAIL A DETAIL B B
SMALL CYLINDER SETUP 3 SMALL CYLINDER SETUP 5
SCALE 1:1 SCALE 1:1

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 3/19/13 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR ROYCE INSTRUMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
x A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM500 INNER SEAL PSA & HEAT
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291624 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 1.84 SHEET 3 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE

2836 B REPLACE PART NUMBER 250309 WITH PART NUMBER 11/17/2014 RH


267573

D D

C C

B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 3/20/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. x ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-500 OUTER SEAL PSA & HEAT
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291626 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 838.00 SHEET 1 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

9 1

23 11
D 13 D

B 29 19

4 7

10
12
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY.
3 5 27 1 200029 AIR CYLINDER, SMC CJPB-6-10-B 1
17 2 200030 SMC AIR CYLINDER, CJPB-15-10 1
3 200259 AIR FITTING 10-32 X 1/16 TB ELBOW 2
21
C
16 4 204056 BEARING 1/8 ID X 3/8 DIA FLANGED 2
C
5 209051 SPRING, STAINLESS STEEL 1

5 6 209244 SPRING; CUSTOM, SS 1


6 7 219206 DOWEL CRS .125 DIA X .50 LG. 2
8 219207 DOWEL PIN CRS 1/8 DIA x 3/4 LG 2
8 9 221005 SHCS SS 4-40 X .75 LG 1
10 223006 BHCS 5-40 X 3/8 2
20 11 223053 BHCS SS 10-32 X 1/2 2
18 12 230001 4-40 X 1/8 STEEL SET SCREW 2
4 13 230018 AS CUP SET 8-32 x 1/4 1
10 22 8 14 230023 10-24 X 3/16 STEEL SET SCREW 1
15 230071 10-24 X 5/16 STEEL SET SCREW 2
16 244010 THERMOCOUPLE 1
17 244012 HEATER WATTLOW 25W 1
25 3 5 18 250159 SEAL ROLLER, LOWER 1
B B
19 260657 HEAT BLOCK 1
20 260666 HEAT BLOCK ISOLATOR 2
21 260669 RETAINING PIN, HEAT SHOE 1
22 261032 SLIDER SHAFT 2
23 261033 UPPER ROLLER MOUNT 1
24 261034 HEAD PLATE 1
4 6 7 26 28 2 7 25 261036 ANVIL, OUTER 1
26 261075 BUMPER, 5MM CYLINDER 1
27 261122 HEAT SHOE, ADJUSTABLE SEALER 1
28 261753 BUMPER, 5MM CYLINDER 1
4 5 6 7 1
24 2 4 5 29 267573 UPPER SEALL ROLLER 1
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 3/20/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005
2 2 3 7
THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. x ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
8 15 SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-500 OUTER SEAL PSA & HEAT
3 - INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV
8 14
B 291626 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 838.00 SHEET 2 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

.200 .069

C C

DETAIL A DETAIL B
LARGE CYLINDER SETUP 3 SMALL CYLINDER SETUP 5
SCALE 1:1 SCALE 1:1
B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 3/20/13 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR ROYCE INSTRUMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
x A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM-500 OUTER SEAL PSA & HEAT
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291626 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 838.00 SHEET 3 OF 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/5/2013 PVO

D B 5/15/2014 D

2797 C REMOVE FIBER OPTIC (105123) FROM BOM 5/15/2014 RH

C C

20.48 8.46

B B

4.60

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/5/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
FRONT TRACK ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291678 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 9.37 SHEET 1 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTE:
ITEM 27, FIBER OPTIC (105123) IS PART
10 OF THE TAPER BASE (291675) AND IS
SHOWN HERE FOR LOCATION ONLY.
D D
16
6 19
23
7
4
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
1
17 1 111002 SAFETY STICKER HAND BURN 1
2
3 2 111124 PITCH SETTING DECAL 1
20 21
9
3 204055 BEARING SFR-188ZZEE 2
13
4 217042 KNOB M4 RED 1
5
5 219015 1/4 X 1 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 4
27
18 6 219043 3/16 X 5/8 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 2

7 221027 SHCS SS 8-32 X 1/2 1


C
8 221031 SHCS SS 8-32 X 1 8
C C
9 221064 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 1 2

10 223034 BHCS 8-32 X 3/8 4

11 223059 BHCS SS 1/4-20 X 3/8 2


26 12 225001 FHCS SS 4-40 X 1/4 7

12 13 230023 10-24 X 3/16 STEEL SET SCREW 1

14 231019 10-24 X 1/4 SS SET SCREW 4


25
15 238001 1/4 SS FLAT WASHER 2

16 261052 MOUNT, OUTER ANVIL 1


NOTE:
THESE PARTS SHOULD NOT BE 17 261060 SHAFT, THREADED ADJUSTER 1
ATTACHED UNTIL FINAL ASSEMBLY 18 261061 COVER, SEALER LOWER 1
B OF THE TM-400 TAPER (291674) B
19 261063 COVER, SEALER OUTER 1
11
15
20 261064 COVER, TRACK SHORT 1

21 261097 GEAR MODIFICATION, 30T 1

24 22 261429 TRACK SHAFT MOUNT 2


14
23 261713 ADJUSTMENT LOCK, POINT 1

8 22 24 261777 TRACK BEARING SHAFT 2

25 267068 TRACK COVER 1

26 267343 FRONT TRACK 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9/5/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
FRONT TRACK ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291678 C
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 9.37 SHEET 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASED

D D

10.00 8.94
C C

17.25

B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 10/24/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
COVER TAPE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291583 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 3.07 SHEET 1 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D
16
13
3
19

2
14
5

6
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
18
1 265658 COVER TAPE ARM 1

(1) LT 242 11 9 2 266749 UPPER CT ARM 1


C C
3 209017 Compression Spring 1

10 20 4 266750 CT SPINDLE HUB 1

5 204051 BEARING, 3/8ID X 7/8OD 2

6 238011 WASHER, FLAT FELT 1


12 15 17 7 216505 QUIKLOC SHAFT COLLAR 1

8 265706 COVERTAPE OUTER COVER 1

1 9 266751 CT BACKING PLATE 1

2 8 10 266752 CT HUB 1

11 241017 BALL PLUNGER 3

7 12 266753 CT SPINDLE 1
B B
13 266754 CT TENSIONING KNOB 1

14 238065 SS SHIM 3/8 ID X 1/8 THICK 2

15 265659 GUIDE SHAFT 1

16 217031 THUMB SCREW 1

17 223062 SS BHCS 1/4-20 X 3/4 1

18 223728 BHCS SS M4 X 6 3

19 221714 SHCS SS M3 X 16 3

20 221052 SHCS SS 10-32 X 3/4 2


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 10/24/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
COVER TAPE ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291583 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 3.07 SHEET 2 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASED 8/27/2008

D D

C C

5.11 1.45

B B
1.44

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
NOTE: TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005
DRAWN RH 10/23/13
THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT

DUE TO NATURE THE ASSEMBLY OF THE TM-50 BASE (290939), TM-


.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A A
50 COVER TAPE GUIDE (290942), AND THE TM-50 MOTOR ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
ENCLOSURE (290943) WILL NEED TO BE BUILT AS YOU GO DURING SURFACE: 32

THE ASSEMBLY OF THE TM-50 INSPECTION MACHINE BASE GENERAL NOTES:


TM50 COVER TAPE GUIDE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
(290960). - BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 290942 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.7934 SHEET 1 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

12

2 9
C C

13

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

7 1 209246 SPRING, .360 DIA 1

2 217042 KNOB M4 RED 1

3 221026 SHCS SS 8-32 X 3/8 1

11 3 4 223010 BHCS SS 4-40 X 5/16 1

5 230022 10-24 X 1/4 STEEL SET SCREW 1


B B
6 261057 GUIDE, C.T. INNER 1

7 261058 GUIDE, C.T. OUTER 1

8 261071 WASHER, C.T. GUIDE ASSEMBLY 1


10
9 261430 SHAFT, C.T. GUIDE ASSEM 1

10 261431 SHAFT, C.T. GUIDE 1


1
11 261432 ROD, THREADED, C.T. GUIDE 1
8
12 262795 ADJUSTMENT KNOB - .500" 1
4 4
13 263588 C.T. GUIDE ADJUSTER 1
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 10/23/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM50 COVER TAPE GUIDE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 290942 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.7934 SHEET 2 OF 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 8/27/2008

D 2769 B REPLACE PART #250214 WITH PART #256087 3/18/2014 RH D

C C

16.24 10.75

B B

3.43

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 10/24/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM50 INFEED ARM CARRIER TAPE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 290945 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 3.32 SHEET 1 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

6
8

10 B
9

11

C C
1

12
13

3 14
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

2 1 205016 BUSHING, FLANGED .5 ID, .75 OD, .5 L 1

2 216504 QUIKLOC SHAFT COLLAR 1


7
3 217007 KNOB, 1/2-13 FOUR LOBE 1

4 219003 1/8 X 3/4 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 1

5 221063 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 3/4 2

6 223083 BHCS SS 5/16 X 1/2 1


B B
7 230022 10-24 X 1/4 STEEL SET SCREW 1

4 5 8 238001 1/4 SS FLAT WASHER 1

9 254566 FEED REAL ARM 1

10 256087 REEL SUPPORT SHAFT 1

11 261086 COVER TAPE SPINDLE COLLAR 1

12 261087 22" REEL SPACER 1

13 261089 REEL EXTENSION ADAPTER 1

14 261091 22" REEL SPACER 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 10/24/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM50 INFEED ARM CARRIER TAPE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 290945 B
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 3.32 SHEET 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 8/6/2015 RH

D D

C C

B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 8/5/15 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR ROYCE INSTRUMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TAKE UP ARM (DANCER)
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 292049 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 4.65 SHEET 1 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

14
D D
20
ITEM NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY

1 104994 SUNX PM-R44P 1


7
2 105786 anahiem automation bdpg-36-57-24v-4200- 1
r27
19 3 107101 CABLE CLAMP 1/8-.140 3

4 204119 3/8" ECLIP 1


8 5 205033 BUSHING 3/8 ID, 1/2 OD, 1/4 L FLANG 2

6 205036 HEYCO 1818 1


6 3 7 217007 KNOB, 1/2-13 FOUR LOBE 1
14 25
8 219003 1/8 X 3/4 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 1
C C
21 11 9 219010 1/8 X 3/8 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 1

10 219014 1/4 X 3/4 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 1


4 11 221062 SHCS SS 1/4-20 X 5/8 2

5 12 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 2

13 221712 SHCS SS M3 X 10 4
2
14 223712 BHCS SS M3 X 8 11

15 225714 FHCS SS M3 X 12 1
10 1 16 225753 FHCS SS M6 X 12 1

17 231038 M5 X 5 ALLOY SET SCREW 1


12
5 18 257999 REEL SPINDLE KEY, 72MM 1
B B
17 22 19 261089 REEL EXTENSION ADAPTER 1
13
20 266216 DC MOTOR COVER 2
24 NOTE:
21 266217 DC MOTOR END CAP 1
9 THIS DOWEL PIN (219010)
18 IS SPACED EQUALY ON 22 266219 DANCER AXEL 1
BOTH SIDES OF DANCER
23 266265 DANCER ARM 1
15 ARM (266265)
23 24 267063 24V TAKE UP SPINDLE 1
16 25 267484 TAKE-UP ARM 1
26
26 268036 TAPE FOLLOWER 1
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 8/5/15 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION
ENG APPR. ~
A
20 .X 0.015
ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR ROYCE INSTRUMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
A
14 BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TAKE UP ARM (DANCER)
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 292049 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 4.65 SHEET 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASED 7/7/2014 RH

D D

C C

16.61
12.65

B B

9.92

0.86

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 7/3/14 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM402 240V BOWL ASSY
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291765 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 146.42 SHEET 1 OF 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

5 5 5

D D

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 103012 D SUB MOUNTING HEX POST (2) 2


32
2 103019 D SUB 37 PIN 1

3 104157 TERMINAL GROUND BLOCK 4


42 4 4 4 4 4 3
4 104158 TERM BLOCK 11
DETAIL A 5 104160 TERM END CAP 7
DETAIL A TERMINAL BLOCK
SCALE 1:2 11 157030 RECEPTICAL 1

12 200201 FITTING 1
C C
13 200280 AIR FITTING, NEEDLE VALVE 1
33
14 200336 SMC # KQ2 HO6-M5 1

15 200636 AIR VALVE 1


47
16 217311 MISUMI- HHDNFA112 2
35
21 221702 SHCS SS M2 X 8 4
45
13 22 221704 SHCS SS M2.5 X 8 6
46 12
15 27 221716 SHCS SS M3 X 20 4
2
1
28 28 221732 SHCS SS M3 X 18 2

30 221755 SHCS SS M6 X 16 8

32 223712 BHCS SS M3 X 8 7
B 14 30 B
41
33 223743 BHCS SS M5 X 12 2
11
22 35 236062 M2 X 25 SS SLOTTED CHEESE HEAD SCREW 2
16
41 266607 BOWL MANIFOLD 1

56 42 266608 BOWL ENCLOSURE COVER 1

45 266774 ENCLOSURE SIDE #1 1

46 266775 ENCLOSURE SIDE #2 1

47 266776 BOWL ASSEMBLY DIN RAIL 1

56 267468 BOWL ASSEMBLY BASEPLATE 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 7/3/14
27 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM402 240V BOWL ASSY
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291765 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 146.42 SHEET 2 OF 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

6 104987 FS-N11CN_11CP_13CP 1

7 104988 AMPLIFIER EPD 2


26
8 105123 FIBER OPTIC FU-57TZ 4
D 24 D
8 9 105807 OP-73864 3

10 107101 CABLE CLAMP 1/8-.140 3


58
17 219001 1/8 X 1/2 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 2
21
18 219003 1/8 X 3/4 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 2
17
19 219010 1/8 X 3/8 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 2
25
21 221702 SHCS SS M2 X 8 4
55
53 22 221704 SHCS SS M2.5 X 8 6

23 221706 SHCS SS M2.5 X 16 4


37
24 221710 SHCS SS M3 X 6 2
36
26 25 221711 SHCS SS M3 X 8 4

C 54 26 221713 SHCS SS M3 X 12 8 C

29 29 221736 SHCS SS M4 X 20 2
50 34
30 221755 SHCS SS M6 X 16 8
22 52
8 31 221758 SHCS SS M6 X 25 8

23 32 223712 BHCS SS M3 X 8 7
19 31
34 224036 FHCS SS M5 X 18 2
49 48
40 36 238043 M4 SS FLAT WASHER 2
23 10
37 242048 LINEAR FEEDER LF9 230V 1

32 51 40 266512 6mm HEAVY WASHER 8


18
44 266767 NEST MOUNT 1
30
48 266779 NEST SHOW PART 1
B B
49 266780 PART STOP SHOW PART 1
44 7
50 266781 NEST COVER SHOW PART 1

9 51 267440 LINEAR RISER BASE 1

52 267441 INLINE RISER 1

53 267443 TRACK ADAPTOR 1


6
54 267445 INLINE RISER TOP 1

55 267446 TRACK FULL SENSOR MOUNT 1

58 TOOLING TRACK COVER SHOW PART 1


30 COVER
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 7/3/14 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM402 240V BOWL ASSY
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291765 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 146.42 SHEET 3 OF 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

57

C C

31

40

B B
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

20 219016 1/4 X 1-1/4 LG. SS DOWEL PIN 3

31 221758 SHCS SS M6 X 25 8
38
38 246497 MISUMI PART # (GDMSB8-30-F15-M6) 2

39 246499 MISUMI PART # (JBHUP8-16) 2


39
40 266512 6mm HEAVY WASHER 8

43 266765 BOWL ASSEMBLY SUB PLATE 1

20 57 CCW BOW L EX AMPLE W I TH


6.625'' DI SCH ARG E (TM500) SHOW 50 BOWL 1
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
43 TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 7/3/14 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
TM402 240V BOWL ASSY
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291765 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 146.42 SHEET 4 OF 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

P200636
TO BOWL SELECTOR

C C

P249969

P200280

FROM BRIDGE ASSEMBLY


B QUICK DISCONNECT B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 PVO 12/7/2012 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
BOWL ASSEMBLY PNEUMATICS
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291765 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): "SW-Mass@P29176E6
SH E.TS5LDOAFS5M"
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISIONS

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 8/6/2015 RH

D D

C C

B B

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 8/5/15 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR ROYCE INSTRUMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
OVER TAPE CAMERA ASSEMBLY
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 292050 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.93 SHEET 1 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTE:
THESE SCREWS ARE 11
FOR ATTACHING THIS
ASSEMBLY TO A TM- 5 8 1
400 SERIES MACHINE
D 17 D
13

7
16
10
12
14 ITEM NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY

8 18 1 02099 SS SHCS M4 x 5mm 2


C C
2 107105 CABLE CLAMP 1/4-.140 1
19
3 221733 SS SHCS M4 x 16mm 2
2 4 8 4 223712 SS BHCS M3 x 8mm 1

5 223733 SS BHCS M4 x 16mm 2

6 238043 M4 STAINLESS WASHER 1

7 239104 SS M4 NUT 1

8 262796 ADJUSTMENT KNOB -.875 3

9 268037 400 CAMERA BRACKET #1 1

10 268038 400 CAMERA BRACKET #2 1

11 268039 400 CAMERA BRACKET #3 1


B B
12 268040 400 CAMERA BRACKET #4 1

13 268041 400 CAMERA BRACKET #5 1

14 268042 400 CAMERA BRACKET #6 1

15 268043 400 CAMERA SHAFT #1 2

16 268044 400 CAMERA SHAFT #2 2

17 268045 400 CAMERA SHAFT #3 2

18 500439 KEYENCE IV-G15MA 1

15 19 500445 V.SENSOR MAGNIFYING LENS BRK 1


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
9 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 RH 8/5/15 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT MAY
.XX 0.010 NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION
.X 0.015
ENG APPR. ~ OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN OR ROYCE INSTRUMENTS LLC, NAPA, CA.
PVO A
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
3 SURFACE: 63

NOTE: GENERAL NOTES: OVER TAPE CAMERA ASSEMBLY


THESE SCREWS ARE FOR - INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV
ATTACHING THIS ASSEMBLY
B 292050 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
TO A TM-400 SERIES MACHINE MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART FINISH
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 0.93 SHEET 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/16/2013 PVO

D D

30.00

C C

30.00

B B

25.66

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/23/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 FRAME ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291667 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NA
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.57 SHEET 1 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D
NOTE:
INSERT ONE PART #249708
INTO END OF TOP RAIL
4 2 5

C C
1

DETAIL C
COMPLETED TOP RAIL ASSEMBLY
SCALE 1:4

B B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 223752 BHCS SS M8 X 16 64
DETAIL A 2 249604 80/20 PART #4336 16
TOP RAIL BRACKET TO LEG DETAIL B
SCALE 1:2 TOP RAIL TO LEG 4 249707 80/20 PART# 3879 32
SCALE 1:2 5 249708 80/20 PART# 3866 10

7 265442 HT FRAME 3 4

8 267027 TM-400 FRAME #1 4


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/23/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
PVO ~
NOTE: .X 0.015 ENG APPR. PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
TITLE:
THESE STEPS ARE REPEATED AT THE
BEND 0.5
SURFACE: 63

TM-400 FRAME ASSEMBLY


OTHER END OF EACH TOP RAIL GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291667 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NA
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.57 SHEET 2 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C
2
DETAIL F
1
7 COMPLETED BOTTOM RAIL ASSEMBLY
SCALE 1:2
4

4 9

B B

DETAIL D
BOTTOM RAIL BRACKET TO LEG DETAIL E
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY
SCALE 1:2 BOTTOM RAIL TO LEG
SCALE 1:2 1 223752 BHCS SS M8 X 16 64

2 249604 80/20 PART #4336 16

4 249707 80/20 PART# 3879 32

7 265442 HT FRAME 3 4

9 267028 TM-400 FRAME #2 4


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/23/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A
NOTE:
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

THESE STEPS ARE REPEATED AT THE GENERAL NOTES:


TM-400 FRAME ASSEMBLY
OTHER END OF EACH BOTTOM RAIL - INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291667 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NA
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.57 SHEET 3 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

4 2

C C

2
1

B B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

1 223752 BHCS SS M8 X 16 64

2 249604 80/20 PART #4336 16


DETAIL G DETAIL H 4 249707 80/20 PART# 3879 32
COMPLETED SIDE ATTACHMENT OF CROSS RAILS TO SIDES 4 9
SCALE 1:8 SCALE 1:8
5 249708 80/20 PART# 3866 10

8 267027 TM-400 FRAME #1 4

9 267028 TM-400 FRAME #2 4


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/23/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 FRAME ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291667 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NA
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.57 SHEET 4 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

DETAIL K
TOP ANCHOR LOCATIONS
C SCALE 1:12 C

B B

DETAIL L
BOTTOM ANCHOR LOCATIONS
SCALE 1:12
DETAIL I DETAIL J
TOP ANCHOR FASTENER BOTTOM ANCHOR FASTENER
SCALE 1:2 SCALE 1:2
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

6 249709 80/20 PART# 40-3897 16


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/23/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 FRAME ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291667 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NA
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.57 SHEET 5 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

C C

DETAIL N
FOOT LOCATIONS
SCALE 1:10
3
B B

DETAIL M ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY


FOOT TO LEG
SCALE 1:2 3 249616 80/20 PART # 2190 4
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 8/23/13
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED, OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. PVO ~ PERMISSION OF V-TEK INC., MANKATO, MN
A ANGULAR: MACHINED 0.1 A
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 FRAME ASSEMBLY
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

B 291667 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NA
WEIGHT (lbs): 38.57 SHEET 6 OF 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REVISI

ECO # REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A RELEASE 9/17/2013 PVO

F
F

E E

D D

43.00
43.00

C C

34.50

B B

NOTE:
SHIP CRATE AS COMPONENTS LISTED
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: NAME DATE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DRAWN RH 9 / 1 7 /1 3
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFO RMATIO N IN TH IS DO CUMENT IS PRO PR IETAR Y AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT

IN THIS BOM, FINAL ASSEMBLY OF


.XX 0.010 MAY NO T B E REPR ODUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. P VO ~ PER MISSIO N O F V-TEK INC., MANKATO , MN
A ANGULAR: MACHI NED 0.1
TITLE:
CRATE TO BE DONE AT V-TEK
BEND 0.5
SURFACE: 32

GENERAL NOTES:
TM-400 CRATE
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

C 291693 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 83.09 SHEET 1 OF 2
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F
F

E E

D D

4 3

3
4

C C

B B

ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY


2
1 267088 TM-400 CRATE TOP 1

2 291690 TM-400 CRATE FLOOR 1

3 291691 TM400 CRATE SIDE (FRONT-BACK) 2

4 291692 TM-400 CRATE SIDE (LEFT-RIGHT) 2

NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
NAME DATE

SHIP CRATE AS COMPONENTS LISTED


DRAWN RH 9 / 1 7 /1 3
TOLERANCES: .XXX 0.005 THE INFO RMATIO N IN TH IS DO CUMENT IS PRO PR IETAR Y AND CO NF IDENTIAL. IT
.XX 0.010 MAY NO T B E REPR ODUCED, TR ANSMITTED, O R USED WITH O UT TH E EX PR ESS
.X 0.015 ENG APPR. P VO ~ PER MISSIO N O F V-TEK INC., MANKATO , MN
A
IN THIS BOM, FINAL ASSEMBLY OF
ANGULAR: MACHI NED 0.1
BEND 0.5 TITLE:
SURFACE: 63

TM-400 CRATE
CRATE TO BE DONE AT V-TEK GENERAL NOTES:
- INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5
- BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES .010 MAX UNLESS NOTED MATERIAL SIZE DWG. NO. REV

C 291693 A
- CHAMFER ALL HOLES .015 X .015 .010 UNLESS NOTED
- ALL MATERIALS, COATINGS, & CLEANING PROCESSES
FINISH
MUST RESULT IN RoHS COMPLIANT PART
- DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
WEIGHT (lbs): 83.09 SHEET 2 OF 2
8 7 6 5
751 Summit Avenue
Mankato, MN USA 56001

Website: www.vtekusa.com
Email: service@vtekusa.com
Phone: (507) 387-2039

For inquiries regarding spare parts, tape and reel supplies, or the ser-
vice department, please call or write:

Phone: (507) 387-2039


Email: service@vtekusa.com
Please provide the machine model and serial numbers with all inquiries.

NOTES

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Service and Parts Contacts 61053915.fm Page 1


TM-402 Document List
Section Pages File Name
Cover Sheet Pages 1 - 2 D292105.1f.fm

EC Declaration of Conformity Page 1 of 1 TM-400 DOC.pdf

Introduction Pages i - xii D292105.2a.fm

Table of Contents Pages 1 - 4 D292105.3c.fm

Chapter 1: Installation & Assembly Pages 1-1 to 1-10 D292105.4a.fm

Chapter 2: Machine Overview Pages 2-1 to 2-12 D292105.5b.fm

Chapter 3: Human Machine Interface Pages 3-1 to 3-30 D292105.6a.fm

Chapter 4: Set-up Pages 4-1 to 4-26 D292105.7b.fm

Chapter 5: Vision Set-up Pages 5-1 to 5-44 D292105.16c.fm

Chapter 6: Operation Pages 6-1 to 6-12 D292105.8b.fm

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting Pages 7-1 to 7-30 D292105.9b.fm

Chapter 8: Maintenance Pages 8-1 to 8-10 D292105.10a.fm

Appendix A: Sensors Pages A-1 to A-6 D291842.11.fm

Spare Parts List Page 1 of 1 D292105.12a.fm

Exploded Views Pages EV-1 to EV-84 D292105.13a.fm

Customer Service Contact Sheet Page 1 of 1 61053915.fm

Document List This Document D292105.15f.fm

Warranty Document Page 1 of 1 WI201.16, Rev.5

Back Cover Page 1 of 1 61666111.fm

TM-401 Document List D292105.15f.fm Page 1


EXPRESS WARRANTY, EXCLUSION AND DISCLAIMER OF UNSTATED WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
V‐TEK Inc (V‐TEK) manufactures equipment for the Royce Instruments and V‐TEK International brands. The following
warranty applies to both product lines.

1. V‐TEK warrants for one year from date of receipt by end user that equipment manufactured by V‐TEK will
be free of defects in workmanship and materials.
2. All integrated products purchased by V‐TEK and integrated on to V‐TEK equipment shall be covered in
accordance with the manufacturer’s pass through warranty and limited in costs equal to the amount of the
manufacturer’s pass through warranty.
3. V‐TEK’s obligation under this warranty applies only to the original Customer and commences when V‐TEK is
notified of name, address of Customer, and date of receipt of equipment.
4. During the warranty period, V‐TEK will replace any defective non‐consumable parts returned for that purpose
to the designated V‐TEK Replacement Parts Center or at V‐TEK’s option, refund original cost of equipment.
5. Authorization to return Articles purchased from V‐TEK must be obtained by Customer before return shipping
commences.
6. Credit may be granted, less an appropriate restocking charge of 15 to 20% of invoice amount, depending on
the reason for the return and condition of the Articles.
7. Returns should always be carefully packed in original shipping carton and sent via ground service. V‐TEK does
not assume any liability for damage incurred during shipment.
8. For the first 30 days that you own your V‐TEK product, V‐TEK will be responsible for ground shipments to and
from V‐TEK’s facility in Mankato, MN, U.S.A. or its designate. For the remainder of your warranty V‐TEK will
pay freight for returning your product to you after its repair.
9. Customer shall bear all charges for customs duty fees or freight above the ground rate or for articles returned
which are not defective.
10. Collect shipments will not be accepted.
11. Insurance coverage during shipping is the responsibility of the Customer. V‐TEK does not assume any liability
for damage incurred during shipment.
12. The warranty applies only to normal use of the equipment and shall be void if V‐TEK determines that defects
in or failures of the equipment were caused by the Customer’s negligence including the lack of proper
preventative maintenance, misuse or accident or by unauthorized repair, alteration or installation.
13. This Warranty does not extend to consumable items or mechanical parts subject to normal wear.
14. Customer’s exclusive remedy for claims against V‐TEK shall be the repair or replacement of defective
equipment and parts.
15. Any modification to the standard configuration of this equipment as delivered will void the warranty, unless
V‐TEK personnel make the modification.
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL V‐TEK BE LIABLE
FOR INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL PENALTIES OR DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR PENALTIES AND/OR
DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN DELIVERY OR FAILURE TO GIVE NOTICE OF DELAY EVEN IF V‐TEK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
PASS THROUGH WARRANTIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM THE RESPECTIVE MANUFACTURERS.

SERIAL NUMBER:
MODEL:
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

Corporate Office: 751 Summit Avenue, Mankato, Minnesota 56001, USA  I.S.O. 9001:2015 Certified  WI201.16, Rev. 5
751 Summit Avenue
Mankato, MN 56001

(507) 387-2039 FAX: (507) 387-2257

www.vtekusa.com
Email: info@vtekusa.com

You might also like